Home

Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations

1. overall width means the maximum overall body width dimension W116 as defined in Section E Ground Vehicle Practice SAE Aerospace Automotive Drawing Standards September 1963 argeur hors tout plan view reference line means a in respect of vehicles with a bench type front seat a line parallel to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle and outboard of the centre of the steering wheel by a distance equal to 0 15 times the difference between one half the shoulder room dimension and the steering wheel centre offset as shown in Figure 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a May 1966 and b in respect of vehicles with individual front seats i a line parallel to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle which passes through the centre of the driver s designated seating position or ii a line parallel to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle located so that the geometric centre of the 95 per cent eye range contour is positioned on the longitudinal centreline of the driver s designated seating position ligne de r f rence longitudinale shoulder room dimension means the front shoulder room dimension W3 as defined in Section E Ground Vehicle Practice SAE Aerospace Automotive Drawing Standards September 1963 espace d paules 95 per cent eye range contour means the 95th percentile tangential cut off specified in SAE Recommended Practice J941a Passenger Car Driver s Eye Range August 1967 95 pour cent du c
2. 2 Every restricted use motorcycle shall be equipped with the reflex reflectors required for motorcycles by section 5 1 1 of TSD 108 3 Lamps retroreflective devices and associated equipment required by this section shall be designed installed and visible in accordance with the requirements of TSD 108 except Figures 11 to 14 16 18 21 and 22 4 Lamps retroreflective devices and associated equipment on a vehicle may conform to the applicable SAE standards and recommended practices contained in the 1994 SAE Handbook instead of the versions of the applicable SAE standards and recommended practices referred to in this section or TSD 108 5 All the information regarding every type of bulb and every type of sealed beam lamp used in lighting equipment required by this section shall be a specified for the type of bulb or sealed beam lamp in i a standard or recommended practice issued by the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE ii a regulation issued by the Economic Commission for Europe ECE or iii a standard issued by the International Electro technical Commission IEC or b provided by the vehicle manufacturer to the Minister at the Minister s request 6 Wherever the word filament appears in this section TSD 108 or an SAE standard or recommended practice it may be read as arc where the requirement applies to a lamp in which light is produced by a gaseous discharge tube or http laws justice gc ca en Sh
3. 2 The drawing referred to in paragraph 1 c a may be displayed on a label applied to the vehicle beside the compliance label or b in the case of an imported vehicle may be replaced by the following statement indicating that the vehicle conforms to the applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations at the time the main assembly of the vehicle was completed THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS PRESCRIBED UNDER THE CANADIAN MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY REGULATIONS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE CE VEHICULE EST CONFORME A TOUTES LES NORMES QUI LUI SONT APPLICABLES EN VERTU DU REGLEMENT SUR LA SECURITE DES V HICULES AUTOMOBILES DU CANADA EN VIGUEUR LA DATE DE SA FABRICATION 3 The compliance label shall be applied a in the case of a bus multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle passenger car truck or low speed vehicle i to the hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position ii to the left side of the instrument panel or the inward facing surface of the door next to the driver s seating position where it is impracticable to apply the label in accordance with subparagraph i or iii to a conspicuous and readily accessible location where it is impracticable to apply the label in accordance with subparagraph i or ii b in the case of a trailer to the forward half of the left side of the trailer so
4. a the information required pursuant to that subsection and b a statement of the total number of vehicles sold in Canada under the expiring exemption 2 Where a company wishes on the expiration of the period of an exemption referred to in subsection 13 4 to obtain a new exemption the company shall submit in writing to the Minister a the information required pursuant to that subsection and b a statement of the total number of vehicles sold in Canada under the expiring exemption SOR 95 147 s 2 DEFECT INFORMATION 15 1 The notice of defect referred to in subsections 10 1 and 3 of the Act shall be given in writing and shall indicate a the name of the company giving the notice b the identifying classification of each vehicle in respect of which the notice is given including its make model model year vehicle identification number and the period during which it was manufactured c the estimated percentage of the potentially affected vehicles that contain the defect d a description of the defect e an evaluation of the safety risk arising from the defect and f a statement of the measures to be taken to correct the defect 2 A company shall within 60 days after it has given a notice of defect submit to the Minister a report referred to in subsection 10 6 of the Act containing in addition to the information required by subsection 1 the following information a the total number of vehicl
5. Ontario 1 Cornwall 2 Fort Erie 3 Fort Frances 4 Lansdowne 5 Niagara Falls Queenston Bridge 6 Pidgeon River 7 Prescott 8 Sarnia 9 Sault Ste Marie 10 Windsor Ambassador Bridge 11 Windsor Tunnel Quebec 12 Lacolle 13 Rock Island 14 St Armand Philipsburg 15 Stanhope New Brunswick 16 Edmundston 17 St Stephen 18 Woodstock Road Manitoba 19 Emerson British Columbia 20 Huntingdon 21 Kingsgate 22 Osoyoos 23 Pacific Highway Saskatchewan 24 North Portal Alberta 25 Coutts SOR 95 147 s 14 Last updated 2009 06 01 Important Notices http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009
6. SOR 90 805 s 2 SOR 91 425 s 3 SOR 92 173 ss 2 5 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 98 125 s 5 SOR 2002 55 s 8 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E RECORDS 10 1 For each vehicle to which the national safety mark is applied or that is imported into Canada a company shall maintain in writing or in readily readable electronic or optical form the records referred to in paragraph 5 1 g of the Act that show that the vehicle conforms to all prescribed standards applicable to it and retain those records for at least five years after the date of manufacture or importation 2 Where the records referred to in subsection 1 are maintained on behalf of a company the company shall keep the name and address of the person who maintains those records 3 On request in writing from an inspector a company shall send to that inspector a copy in either official language of the records referred to in subsection 1 within a 30 working days after the mailing of the request or b where the records must be translated 45 working days after the mailing of the request SOR 79 940 s 3 SOR 87 450 s 1 SOR 88 536 s 1 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 98 524 s 2 SOR 2008 104 s 2 SOR 2009 32 s 1 IMPORTATION DOCUMENT 11 1 Subject to subsections 2 and 4 to 6 any person importing into Canada a vehicle of a prescribed class http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 22 de 131 shall at the nearest cust
7. i Repealed SOR 2002 55 s 4 1 1 If an incomplete vehicle manufacturer or an intermediate manufacturer assumes legal responsibility for the completed vehicle s conformity to the requirements of these Regulations the incomplete vehicle manufacturer or the intermediate manufacturer as the case may be shall ensure that a compliance label is applied to the completed vehicle in accordance with this section except that a the name of the incomplete vehicle manufacturer or the intermediate manufacturer as the case may be shall appear on the compliance label instead of the name of the manufacturer referred to in paragraph 1 a and b the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle may be no earlier than the date on which manufacturing operations on the vehicle are completed by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer and no later than the date on which manufacturing operations on the vehicle are completed by the final stage manufacturer 1 2 If an incomplete vehicle manufacturer assumes legal responsibility for the completed vehicle s conformity to the requirements of these Regulations the provisions related to vehicles manufactured in stages set out in sections 6 1 to 6 6 do not apply 1 3 If an intermediate manufacturer assumes legal responsibility for the completed vehicle s conformity to the requirements of these Regulations the provisions related to vehicles manufactured in stages set out in sections 6 3 to 6 6 do not apply
8. car used in S6 3 6 and S6 3 7 of the English version of TSD 135 shall be read as vehicle 7 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 97 200 s 5 SOR 99 357 s 5 SOR 2001 35 s 6 SOR 2003 272 s 20 SOR 2005 42 s 13 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 104 s 15 SOR 2009 79 s 4 PART III 200 Repealed SOR 83 138 s 2 OCCUPANT PROTECTION 201 1 In this section http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 63 de 131 head impact area means the non glazed surfaces of the interior of the vehicle that are capable of being contacted statically by the head form of a measuring device in accordance with the following procedure or its graphic equivalent a at each designated seating position by placing the pivot point of the measuring device i for seats that are adjustable fore and aft at A the seating reference point and B a point 130 mm five inches horizontally forward of the seating reference point displaced vertically 20 mm 0 75 inches or a distance equal to the rise that results from a 130 mm five inches forward adjustment of the seat and ii for seats that are not adjustable fore and aft at the seating reference point b with the pivot point to top of head dimension at each adjustment allowed for the measuring device by the interior dimension of the vehicle by determining all contact points above the lower windshield glass line and forward o
9. 1 Every incomplete vehicle manufacturer shall apply to every incomplete vehicle it manufactures an information label that displays the following a a statement in both official languages that the vehicle is an incomplete vehicle b the name of the incomplete vehicle manufacturer c the month and year the incomplete vehicle manufacturer performed its last manufacturing operation on the incomplete vehicle d the vehicle identification number e the GVWR intended for the vehicle when it is a completed vehicle expressed in kilograms clearly identified by the words Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Poids nominal brut du v hicule or the abbreviations GVWR and PNBV f the GAWR expressed in kilograms intended for each axle of the vehicle when it is a completed vehicle listed in order from front to rear and clearly identified by the words Gross Axle Weight Ratings and Poids nominal brut sur l essieu or the abbreviations GAWR and PNBE except that i the GAWR for consecutive axles that have identical GAWRs when equipped with tires that have the same designated tire size may be stated once followed by the words each and chacun and ii the information need not appear on the label if it is set out on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label referred to in section S4 3 of Technical Standards Document No 110 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a G
10. 1 3 shall meet the requirements of sections 5 1 S5 2 and S5 3 of TSD 305 2 This section expires on January 1 2010 SOR 2001 486 s 2 SOR 2003 272 s 32 SOR 2004 89 s 4 SOR 2004 250 s 5 SOR 2005 42 ss 9 10 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E INTERIOR TRUNK RELEASE STANDARD 401 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 123 de 131 401 1 Every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle shall conform to the requirements for passenger cars set out in Technical Standards Document No 401 Interior Trunk Release TSD 401 as amended from time to time 2 However vehicles manufactured before September 1 2010 need not be equipped with an interior trunk release 3 This section does not apply to vehicles equipped with a back door as defined in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations 4 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 2007 180 s 19 SOR 2008 73 s 4 LOW SPEED VEHICLES STANDARD 500 500 1 Every low speed vehicle shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 500 Low speed Vehicles TSD 500 as amended from time to time 2 to 5 Not in force 6 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 2000 304 s 6 SOR 2005 42 ss 11 12 SOR 2008 229 s 3 VEHICLE STABILITY 505 1 Subject to subsection 2 the height of the centre of mass shown in Figure 1 of a motor tricycle or a three wheeled vehicle shall not exceed one and a h
11. 223 1 The definitions in this subsection apply in this section dangerous goods has the same meaning as in section 2 of the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act 1992 marchandises dangereuses ground clearance means the vertical distance from the bottom edge of a horizontal member to the ground garde au sol guard width means in respect of a rear impact guard that is installed on a trailer the maximum horizontal guard dimension that is perpendicular to the longitudinal vertical plane passing through the longitudinal centreline of the trailer largeur du dispositif de protection horizontal member means the horizontal structural member of a rear impact guard pi ce horizontale hydraulic guard means a rear impact guard designed to use fluid properties to provide a resistance force to deformation dispositif de protection hydraulique low chassis trailer means a trailer that has a chassis that extends behind the rearmost point of the rearmost tires and that has a lower rear surface that meets the configuration requirements of subsections 6 to 8 remorque a chassis surbaiss outboard means in respect of a trailer away from the trailer centreline and toward the side extremities of the trailer ext rieur pulpwood trailer means a trailer that is designed exclusively to carry harvested logs or pulpwood and that is constructed with a skeletal frame with no means for the attachment of a solid bed body or con
12. SOR 2001 116 s 2 SOR 2005 42 ss 5 6 SOR 2009 79 s 3 LIGHT VEHICLE BRAKE SYSTEMS STANDARD 135 SOR 2001 35 s 5 135 1 Every passenger car every three wheeled vehicle and every multi purpose passenger vehicle truck and bus with a GVWR of 3 500 kg or less shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 135 Light Vehicle Brake Systems TSD 135 as amended from time to time 2 The statement set out in S5 4 3 of TSD 135 may be replaced by another statement to the same effect 3 Despite S5 5 and S5 5 5 b of TSD 135 if a common indicator is used the indicator shall display the symbol for brake system malfunction referred to in subsection 101 9 of this Schedule 4 Despite S5 5 of TSD 135 the words required to be displayed under S5 5 5 of TSD 135 a in the cases referred to in S5 5 5 d 1 2 4 and 5 of TSD 135 and in the case of the variable brake proportioning system indicator referred to in S5 5 5 d 3 of TSD 135 may be replaced or accompanied by a symbol that conforms to the colour requirements of subsection 101 9 1 of this Schedule and b shall be displayed in both official languages if not accompanied by a symbol 5 Despite S5 5 and S5 5 5 d 3 of TSD 135 if a separate indicator is used to indicate an electrical functional failure in an antilock brake system the indicator shall display the corresponding symbol shown in Table Il to section 101 of this Schedule 6 The word
13. SOR 95 147 s 2 PRESCRIBED CLASSES OF VEHICLES 4 1 The classes of vehicles set out in Schedule Ill are prescribed as classes of vehicles in respect of which these Regulations apply 1 1 An incomplete vehicle is prescribed as a class of vehicle in respect of which these Regulations apply 2 The prescribed classes referred to in subsections 1 and 1 1 do not include a vehicle that was manufactured 15 years or more before the date of its importation into Canada except for a bus SOR 82 482 s 3 SOR 88 268 s 2 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 2 SAFETY AND EMISSION REQUIREMENTS SOR 97 376 s 1 5 1 Each requirement set out in Schedules IV to VI is prescribed as a Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard for vehicles of prescribed classes 2 Subject to subsection 2 1 every vehicle of a prescribed class that is a completed vehicle shall conform to a each standard referred to by number in column of Schedule III opposite which there is set out the letter X in the subcolumn designating that class or subclass of vehicle b Repealed SOR 2003 2 s 46 2 1 Repealed SOR 2003 2 s 46 3 Every incomplete vehicle shall conform to each standard set out in Schedules IV V 1 and VI for completed vehicles to the extent that the standard governs the components that are fitted on the incomplete vehicle SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 97 376 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 3 SOR 2003 2 s 46 SOR 2003 272 s 3 INTERPROVI
14. a a static load rating of i 800 KN in the longitudinal direction and ii 80 KN in the lateral direction and b a static moment rating of 76 2 kN m about the longitudinal axis of the C dolly http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 127 de 131 3 Where a coupling referred to in subsection 1 consists of two separate hitches the hitches shall a be separated laterally by a distance of 762 mm 2 mm b be equidistant from the longitudinal centre line of the trailer c have a mounting height of 900 mm 10 mm when the trailer is not loaded and d each have a static load rating of i 400 kN in the longitudinal direction ii 100 KN in the vertical direction and iii 40 KN in the lateral direction SOR 93 146 s 4 SOR 2008 104 s 23 TRAILER CARGO ANCHORING DEVICES STANDARD 905 905 1 The definitions in this subsection apply in this section bulkhead means a fixed or removable structure installed across the width of a trailer to restrict the movement of cargo during transport cloison cargo anchoring device means a fitting or attachment point on a trailer other than a bulkhead or rub rail to which a tie down assembly is attached dispositif d ancrage des chargements rub rail means a protector strip extending horizontally along the sides of a trailer intended to provide protection from scuffing bourrelet de protection 2 This section applies
15. a separate 110 to 125 V electric power supply or an LP gas supply autocaravane motor tricycle means a motorcycle other than an antique reproduction vehicle that a is designed to travel on three wheels in contact with the ground b has seating on which all occupants must sit astride c has no more than four designated seating positions d has a GVWR of 1 000 kg or less and e does not have a structure partially or fully enclosing the driver and passenger other than that part of the vehicle forward of the driver s torso and the seat backrest tricycle moteur Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods Repealed SOR 97 141 s 1 Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods section 106 Brake Hoses Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods section 116 Hydraulic Brake Fluid Repealed SOR 95 536 s 7 Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods section 116 Hydraulic Brake Fluids Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 multiple compartment lamp Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 multiple lamp arrangement Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 multi purpose passenger vehicle means a vehicle having a designated seating capacity of 10 or less that is constructed either on a truck chassis or with special features for occasional off road operation but does not include an air cushion vehicle an all terrain vehicle a golf cart a low speed vehicle a passenger car a three wheeled vehicle a truck or a vehicle imported temp
16. flash means a cycle of automatic activation and deactivation of a lamp that continues until stopped either automatically or manually clignotement forward control configuration means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length type a cabine avanc e free length Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 front outboard designated seating position means the driver s designated seating position and the forwardmost right outboard designated seating position but does not include a school bus passenger designated seating position place assise d sign e ext rieure avant fuel container means one or more fuel containers with integral valving pressure relief devices tubing hoses and mounting brackets r servoir de carburant fuel level indicator means a device that presents information concerning the amount of fuel in the tank indicateur de niveau de carburant fuel level tell tale means a signal that when alight indicates that the fuel level is close to zero or that the vehicle is running on its fuel reserve t moin de niveau de carburant fuel metering device means the carburetor fuel injector fuel distributor or fuel injection pump dispositif de dosage du carburant fuel spillage means the fall flow or run of fuel from a vehicle but does not include wetness resulti
17. formation peak crush resistance means the greatest force required to deform the door of a vehicle over the entire crush distance of 457 mm r sistance maximale a la d formation 2 Every side door that is designed to be used for the egress of occupants from a truck multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less or from a passenger car or three wheeled vehicle shall demonstrate the following resistances calculated in accordance with Test Method 214 Side Door Strength November 14 1996 when tested in accordance with those test methods with the seats removed or installed at the option of the manufacturer a when tested with the seats removed i an initial crush resistance of not less than 10 01 kN ii an intermediate crush resistance of not less than 15 57 kN and iii a peak crush resistance of not less than two times the curb mass of the vehicle or 31 14 kN whichever is the lesser or b when tested with the seats installed i an initial crush resistance of not less than 10 01 kN ii an intermediate crush resistance of not less than 19 46 kN and iii a peak crush resistance of not less than three and one half times the curb mass of the vehicle or 53 38 kN whichever is the lesser 3 For the purposes of paragraph 2 a only those seats that may affect any load applied during the test must be removed from the vehicle 4 Subsection 2 does not apply in respect of a the detach
18. gina 107 de 131 INSIDE WALL S2INCHLS 132 08 em 7T INCHES 120 34 em INSIOI WALL 05 06 2009 Print http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en Pagina 108 de 131 23 INCHES mS ZE CRIS 58 42 cm ees J N X lso WS NS 4 2 230 Em NNN N CCESS REGION S O N FOR LOW FORCES 7 ameter eo SOS Ox N DOC de os 71 INCHES S25 480 34 cm S27 INCHES 4132 08 em 24 INCHES 160 96 em INSIDE WALL FINCHES 5 08 cm INSIDE FLOUR 38 SIDE EMERGENCY EXT 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 109 de 131 23 INCH RADIUS FIGURE 3 CONTINUED 58 42 cm ai ae Lo ACCESS REGION PA FOR LOW FORCES PROP IS BRA po ds E o PR 71 INCHES FERE 7 ACCESS d em AS ge wos Rs Ear REGION 380 38 cm Pa a CAs C PEN EL FOR HIGH 52 INCHES 4 A x Lou a o ss 132 08 cm As Tae l Kf As t 4 ia S ak es P REAR SHELF 2 INCHES 5 08 cm N INCHES INSIDE FLOOR OF UPRIGHT BUS TYPICAL CLEARANCE AROUND OBSTRUCTIONS 3C REAR EMERGENCY EXIT WITH REAR OBSTRUCTION http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 110 de 131 23 INCHES 58 42 cm INSIDE CEILING 7 INCHES mn 180 34 em 2 INCHES 1937 08 em ACCESS PLGION FOR LON FORCES SRO ray i OOSA ACCESS REGION FOR HIGH FOKCES See Oe OK 505 7 INCHES ee 1180 34 em
19. the bus shall be equipped in its rear half with a roof emergency exit that meets the requirements of subsections 11 to 14 when the bus is overturned on its side and any occupant is standing facing the roof emergency exit 8 The unobstructed openings required by subsection 3 shall be provided in every bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib or less by a devices that meet the requirements of subsections 11 to 14 and do not use remote controls or central power systems b windows that can be opened manually to a position providing an opening large enough to admit unobstructed passage of an ellipsoid with its major axis parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle that is generated by the rotation about its minor axis of an ellipse having a major axis of 500 mm 20 inches and a minor axis of 330 mm 13 inches or c doors 9 Every school bus shall be provided with at the option of the manufacturer a one rear emergency door that opens outward and is hinged on the right side for a bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 104 de 131 b at least one rear emergency door that opens outward and is hinged on either side for a bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib or less or c the following emergency exits namely i one emergency door A hinged on its forward side and B located on the left side of the
20. 301 except for the fuel spillage requirements under the applicable conditions set out in sections 3 2 to 3 4 of Test Method 301 2 CNG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 and paragraph S7 2 b of TSD 301 1 3 Subsections 1 1 and 1 2 expire on February 28 2009 2 When a vehicle is tested in accordance with subsection 1 1 1 or 1 2 a the fuel container shall remain attached to the vehicle at a minimum of one attachment point and b when the pressure in the high pressure portion of the fuel system is the greater of the maximum operating pressure and 20 680 kPa this pressure shall not decrease during the 60 minute period after each impact by more than the greater of i 1 062 kPa and ii the product expressed in kPa obtained using the following formula 895 T VFs where T is the ambient temperature of the test gas in degrees Kelvin and Veg is the volume of the high pressure portion of the fuel system in litres 3 Instead of complying with subsection 1 a vehicle other than a school bus that is equipped with a fuel system that uses CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion may comply with section 4 of the version of Canadian Standards Association Standard CSA B109 Natural Gas for Vehicles Installation Code that is in effect 24 months before the date of the last manufacturing operation performed by the manufacturer who installed the fuel system as shown on the manufacturer s information label or
21. 42 ss 7 8 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 73 s 3 SOR 2009 34 s 1 ANCHORAGE OF SEATS 207 1 Each vehicle shall have an occupant seat for the driver and such occupant seat and all other occupant seats except a side facing seat or a bus passenger seat shall when subjected to Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods Section 207 Anchorage of Seats approved December 7 1973 withstand when installed in the vehicle a in any position to which it can be adjusted i the application of a force equal to 20 times the weight of the seat applied separately in A a forward and B a rearward longitudinal direction through the centre of gravity of the seat and simultaneously in the case of a seat having one or more seat belt assemblies attached directly to it ii the application of a force equal to the total load imposed on the seat by simultaneous application in the directions referred to in clauses i A and B of the respective loads required by section 210 of this Schedule for the seat belt assemblies so attached and b in its rearmost position application of a force that i produces a moment of 3 300 pound inches about the seating reference point for each designated seating position for which the occupant seat is designed and ii is applied to the upper seat back or the upper cross member of the seat back A in a rearward longitudinal direction for forward facing seats and B in a forward longitudinal direction for rearward
22. 5 6 or 7 a section 3 subsection 4 3 sections 6 to 10 and subsections 12 1 12 2 and 12 16 of National Standard of Canada CAN ULC S338 98 entitled Automobile Theft Deterrent Equipment and Systems Electronic Immobilization May 1998 published by the Underwriters Laboratories of Canada b the general and particular specifications of an immobilizer that are set out in Part Ill of ECE Regulation No 97 entitled Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Vehicle Alarm Systems VAS and of Motor Vehicles with Regard to Their Alarm Systems AS as revised on August 8 2007 or c the general and particular specifications of an immobilizer that are set out in Part IV of ECE Regulation No 116 entitled Uniform Technical Prescriptions Concerning the Protection of Motor Vehicles Against Unauthorized Use as revised on March 6 2006 5 The requirements set out in National Standard of Canada CAN ULC S338 98 are modified as follows a the requirements respecting non OEM systems as defined in section 2 respecting local noise regulations and respecting radio frequency interference immunity do not apply and b a reference to a manufacturer of an electronic immobilization system is to be read as a reference to a manufacturer 6 The requirements set out in Part Ill of ECE Regulation No 97 are modified as follows a the aftermarket type approval and radio emission requirements do not apply b for the purposes
23. 90 dBA when a value of 2 dBA is subtracted from the average sound level obtained in accordance with the test SOR 2005 342 s 6 SCHEDULE VI Section 5 SOR 95 147 s 13 1200 Repealed SOR 96 360 s 1 SNOWMOBILE STANDARDS 1201 1 Every snowmobile shall be constructed so that it conforms to the requirements set out in the following standards a the Safety Standards for Snowmobile Product Certification SSCC 11 published by the Snowmobile Safety and Certification Committee Inc dated February 6 2003 except that the following provisions do not apply i section 13 respecting vehicle identification numbers ii section 14 respecting certification markings of exhaust systems iii Figures 4 6 and 7 respecting labelling requirements and iv subsection 12 c 6 requiring a label stating that the use of children s snowmobiles is prohibited on public trails and b the Detailed Standards and Testing Specifications and Procedures SSCC 11 Supplement published by the Snowmobile Safety and Certification Committee Inc dated February 6 2003 except that the following provisions do not apply i section 3 1 of L S 300A ii subsection 4 3 3 and section 5 of L S 300A respecting packing requirements iii subsection 6 2 of L S 300A respecting ordering information iv section 6 of 62 GP 11P respecting packing requirements and v section 8 2 of 62 GP 11P respecting ordering data 1 1 When a snowmob
24. 97 14 s 1 SOR 97 141 s 3 SOR 97 200 s 2 SOR 97 201 s 2 SOR 97 376 s 4 SOR 97 421 s 2 SOR 97 463 s 1 SOR 97 532 ss 1 2 SOR 98 160 s 2 SOR 98 457 s 2 SOR 98 595 s 1 SOR 99 357 s 2 SOR 2000 182 s 4 SOR 2000 304 s 4 SOR 2001 35 ss 2 3 SOR 2001 353 s 1 SOR 2001 486 s 1 SOR 2002 55 s 12 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 30 de 131 SOR 2002 205 s 2 SOR 2003 272 s 6 SOR 2003 359 ss 1 to 3 SOR 2004 195 s 1 SOR 2005 45 s 2 SOR 2006 94 s 1 SOR 2007 180 ss 2 to 4 SOR 2007 246 s 1 SOR 2008 73 s 2 SOR 2008 104 ss 7 F 8 F SOR 2008 229 s 2 SOR 2008 258 ss 5 6 SOR 2009 33 s 1 F SOR 2009 121 s 1 SCHEDULE IV Sections 2 5 and 6 and subsection 12 3 SOR 95 147 s 6 PARTI Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 5 PARTII LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS 101 1 The following controls and components where fitted on a vehicle shall be fitted in such a manner that they are operable by the driver while the driver is seated in the driver s designated seating position with the driver s seat belt fastened around the driver in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions a the accelerator b the automatic vehicle speed system c the choke if manually operated d the clutch pedal e the driver s sun visor the engine start control 9 the engine stop control h the
25. E SOR 2007 180 s 11 SOR 2008 72 s 4 F SOR 2009 122 s 1 DRIVER IMPACT PROTECTION AND STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM 203 1 The steering control system of a vehicle shall be constructed in such a manner that no component or attachment including any horn actuating mechanism is capable during normal driving manoeuvres of catching the driver s clothing or the driver s jewellery such as a watch a ring or a bracelet other than a bracelet with loosely attached or dangling members 2 Subject to subsection 4 the steering control system of every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle and every multi purpose passenger vehicle bus and truck other than a walk in van with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less shall be tested in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J944 Steering Control System Passenger Car Laboratory Test Procedure June 1980 3 The following requirements with respect to the steering control system shall be met during the test referred to in subsection 2 a the system shall be impacted by a body block at a relative velocity of 24 km h b the impact force developed on the chest of the body block and transmitted to the system shall not exceed 11 120 N except for intervals with a cumulative duration of not more than 3 ms 4 Subsections 2 and 3 do not apply to a vehicle that complies with the requirements set out in subsections 208 22 and 23 SOR 79 719 s 2 SOR 83 138 s 3 SOR 90 38
26. Figure 2 or Figure 3 12 The lower edge of the low force access region in Figure 1 and the lower edge of region B of the high force access region in Figure 2 shall be located a 130 mm five inches above the adjacent seat or b if an arm rest is fitted 50 mm two inches above the arm rest whichever is the higher 13 When tested in accordance with the conditions set out in subsections 24 and 26 both before and after the window retention test described by subsection 2 every emergency exit of a bus other than an emergency door required by subsection 9 shall allow manual release of the exit release mechanism by an occupant using at the option of the manufacturer a a low force application of not more than 90 N 20 pounds in a rotational or linear direction if the emergency exit release mechanism is located as shown in Figure 1 or Figure 3 of this section or b a high force application of not more than 270 N 60 pounds in a linear direction perpendicular to the undisturbed emergency exit surface if the emergency exit release mechanism is located as shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3 of this section 14 Every emergency exit release mechanism shall require for its operation not more than two applications of force one of which must differ by 90 to 180 degrees from the direction of the initial push out motion of the emergency exit 15 Under the conditions set out in subsections 24 and 26 both before and after the window
27. Guards 23 301 Fuel System Integrity 301 1 LPG Fuel System Integrity CNG Fuel System Integrity Fuel System Integrity for Three wheeled Vehicles and Motorcycles Flammability of Interior Materials Electrolyte Spillage and Electrical Shock Protection 401 Interior Trunk Release 500 Low speed Vehicles Vehicle Stability 9 05 01 03 C dolly Specifications 904 C dolly Hitch Requirements 5 Trailer Cargo Anchoring Devices Snowmobile Trailers Noise Emissions Snowmobile Standards Snowmobile Cutters Repealed SOR 2003 359 s 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x SOR 78 80 s 1 SOR 78 910 s 1 F SOR 79 305 s 1 SOR 79 306 s 2 SOR 79 339 s 2 SOR 79 340 s 2 SOR 79 374 s 2 SOR 79 677 s 2 SOR 79 940 s 5 SOR 80 160 s 1 SOR 80 161 s 2 SOR 80 282 s 2 SOR 80 439 s 2 SOR 80 639 s 1 F SOR 81 88 s 2 SOR 81 665 s 1 SOR 82 656 s 2 SOR 82 753 s 2 SOR 82 754 s 2 SOR 83 138 s 1 SOR 84 812 s 2 SOR 86 682 s 1 SOR 86 683 s 2 SOR 86 975 s 1 SOR 87 658 s 1 SOR 87 660 s 3 SOR 88 268 s 4 SOR 89 384 ss 2 F 3 to 5 SOR 90 805 s 4 SOR 91 425 s 3 SOR 92 173 s 5 SOR 92 250 s 2 F SOR 92 545 s 2 F SOR 93 31 s 2 SOR 93 146 s 3 SOR 93 561 s 2 SOR 94 291 s 2 SOR 94 669 s 2 SOR 95 60 s 1 SOR 95 147 ss 5 15 F SOR 95 164 s 2 SOR 96 89 s 1 SOR 96 366 s 4 SOR 96 437 s 1 SOR
28. TSD 108 32 Despite section S7 4 a 3 of TSD 108 a motorcycle headlamp system is not required to be equipped with the Vehicle Headlamp Aiming Device VHAD specified in section S7 8 5 2 of TSD 108 33 Despite section S7 5 g of TSD 108 where the only replaceable light source in a headlamp is Type HB1 the lens of the headlamp shall bear a permanent marking that states the HB Type 34 to 39 Reserved 40 Every front fog lamp assembly or auxiliary front lamp assembly that may be switched on simultaneously with the low beam headlamps on a bus truck multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car or three wheeled vehicle shall a in the case of a lamp assembly that has a mechanism that allows adjustment of the vertical and horizontal aim conform to sections S7 8 2 S7 8 2 2 S7 8 3 S7 8 4 and S7 8 5 1 c of TSD 108 and b in the case of a lamp assembly that has a mechanism that only allows adjustment of the vertical aim conform to sections S7 8 2 except that no horizontal aim mechanism need be provided S7 8 2 2 S7 8 3 and S7 8 5 1 c of TSD 108 41 For the purpose of demonstrating the compliance of a headlamp assembly with the torque deflection test described in section S7 8 5 1 a of TSD 108 the downward torque of 2 25 Nem 20 Ib in shall be measured at the aiming reference plane as defined in section S4 of TSD 108 42 The information contained in a label referred to in section S7 8 5 2 b of TSD 108 shall be in bo
29. a the downward vertical movement at any point on the application plate shall not exceed 130 mm 5 1 8 inches and b every exit required by section 217 of this Schedule except roof emergency exits shall meet the emergency exit opening requirement of that section with the force applied and after the force has been released 3 An exit required by section 217 of this Schedule other than a roof emergency exit that has met the emergency exit opening requirement of that section with the force described in subsection 2 applied in the manner described therein need not meet the emergency exit opening requirement after the force has been released SOR 79 940 s 9 SCHOOL BUS BODY JOINT STRENGTH STANDARD 221 221 1 The following definitions in this subsection apply in this section body component means a part of a bus body including floor panels made from a single piece of homogeneous material or from a single piece of composite material such as plywood or plastic l ment de carrosserie body panel means a body component used on the exterior or interior surface of a bus to enclose the bus occupant space panneau de carrosserie body panel joint means the area of contact attachment or close proximity between the edges of a body panel and another body component joint de panneau de carrosserie bus body means the portion of a bus that encloses the bus occupant space including the floor and the body panel separating the en
30. a detailed description of how the vehicle equipped with the new kinds of vehicle systems or components would if exempted differ from one that conforms to the prescribed standards ii the reasons why not conforming to the prescribed standards does not substantially diminish the safe performance of the vehicle and iii a discussion of other means of conformity that were considered and the reasons for rejecting each of them b the reasons why an exemption would facilitate the development or the field evaluation of the vehicle and c a statement as to whether the company intends at the end of the exemption period the vehicle to conform to the prescribed standards 5 Where the Governor in Council has made an exemption order pursuant to section 9 of the Act for a model of vehicle a label shall be securely applied by the company to the windshield or side window of every vehicle of that model specifying a the features of the vehicle and the standards by number and title in respect of which the exemption has been granted and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 26 de 131 b the short title of the exemption order SOR 86 995 s 1 SOR 89 481 s 1 SOR 90 805 s 3 SOR 95 147 s 2 14 1 Where a company wishes on the expiration of the period of an exemption referred to in subsection 13 3 to obtain a new exemption the company shall submit in writing to the Minister
31. absorbed in deflecting the seat back shall be not less than 316 4 W Nm 2800W inch pounds as determined from the force deflection curve 8 1 In subsection 8 force deflection curve means a for the purposes of paragraphs 8 a and b the force applied by means of the loading bar and the rearward travel distance of the pivot attachment point of the loading bar measured from the point at which the initial application of 222 4 N 50 pounds of force is attained and b for the purposes of paragraph 8 f the force applied by means of the loading bar and the rearward and forward travel distance of the pivot attachment point of the loading bar measured from the position at which the initial application of 222 4 N 50 pounds of force is attained 9 No seat cushion with which a school bus passenger seat is equipped shall where all the manual attachment devices between the seat and the seat cushion are in the manufacturer s designed position for attachment separate from the seat at any attachment point when subjected to an upward force of five times the seat cushion weight applied in any period of not less than one nor more than two seconds and maintained for five seconds 10 A restraining barrier shall be provided forward of any designated seating position that does not have the rear surface of another school bus passenger seat within 610 mm 24 inches of the seating reference point measured along a horizontal line through the seat
32. assigned by the manufacturer during the manufacturing process if the manufacturer manufactures less than 1 000 vehicles of a prescribed class annually and h the fourteenth to seventeenth characters shall be numeric for all vehicles and the thirteenth character shall be numeric if the vehicle is a multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car three wheeled vehicle or truck having a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less 4 Repealed SOR 2004 250 s 3 5 Each character used in a vehicle identification number shall be one of the Arabic numerals or Roman letters specified in Table Ill 6 Repealed SOR 88 535 s 1 7 The check digit referred to in paragraph 3 c shall be determined by a assigning to each numeral of the vehicle identification number the actual mathematical value of that numeral b assigning to each letter the mathematical value for that letter specified in Table IV c multiplying the assigned value for each character of the vehicle identification number by the weight factor set out opposite that character in Table V and d adding together the numbers obtained under paragraph c and dividing the total by 11 8 The fractional portion of the quotient obtained by paragraph 7 d multiplied by 11 shall be the check digit except that if that product is 10 the check digit shall be X 9 The Minister may require manufacturers of vehicles in respect of which this section applies to submit to the Minister those char
33. company to conform on the date of manufacture to the applicable safety standards of the Snowmobile Safety and Certification Committee Inc as shown on the certification label on the snowmobile or on a written statement from the company that manufactured the http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 23 de 131 snowmobile b any defect in the vehicle s construction design or functioning or in the construction design or functioning of its components that was the subject of a notice of defect or nonconformity under United States federal laws was corrected c in the case of an incomplete vehicle truck enclosed motorcycle multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle passenger car or bus the vehicle was manufactured by the company that completed the main assembly of the vehicle to conform to section 210 of Schedule IV d in the case of a school bus the vehicle was manufactured by the company that completed the main assembly of the vehicle to conform to section 222 of Schedule IV d 1 in the case of a restricted use motorcycle the vehicle is designed to travel on two or four wheels e where the person is importing the vehicle for sale or for any commercial industrial occupational institutional or other like use the vehicle is imported at a customs office designated in Schedule VIII and f the person registers the vehicle with the registrar of imported vehicle
34. d for a specific driver s eye position the requirements of subsections 16 to 25 shall be satisfied with the still or video camera positioned at either the left or right eye point e the still or video camera shall be supported so as to allow pivoting i in the vertical and horizontal planes of its image plane to no greater than the maximum allowable limits of eye rotation specified in SAE Recommended Practice J1050 Describing and Measuring the Driver s Field of View August 1994 and ii in the horizontal plane of its image plane to no greater than the maximum allowable limit of neck rotation specified in SAE Recommended Practice J1050 at a point corresponding to the neck pivot point as specified in that Recommended Practice only after the maximum limits of eye rotation have been reached http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 53 de 131 f all of the still or video camera observations shall be done with the service door of the bus closed and the stop signal arm fully retracted and g for the purposes of subsection 21 the front bumper shall be the forwardmost structural contour of the bumper excluding the fasteners protruding discrete bumper stops and any attached accessories such as crossing control arms which shall be removed prior to testing Other Vehicles 26 Every multi purpose passenger vehicle truck and bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 pounds or less
35. d rouleur cargo carrying capacity means the mass that is equal to or less than the result obtained by subtracting from the gross vehicle weight rating the sum of a the unloaded vehicle mass b the product obtained by multiplying the designated seating capacity by 54 kg in the case of a school bus or by 68 kg in any other case and c in the case of a vehicle having living or sanitary accommodations the mass of its fresh water hot water and propane tanks but not its waste water tanks when full capacit de chargement chassis cab Repealed SOR 2002 55 s 1 check digit means a single number or the letter X used to verify the accuracy of the transcription of the vehicle identification number unit de contr le child means a person whose mass is between 9 kg 20 pounds and 22 kg 48 pounds inclusive enfant child restraint system Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 chipping Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 CMVSS is an abbreviation for Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard NSVAC competition car Repealed SOR 2000 182 s 1 competition motorcycle Repealed SOR 2000 182 s 1 competition snowmobile Repealed SOR 2000 182 s 1 competition vehicle means a vehicle that is designed for use exclusively in closed course competition and a bears a label affixed by the manufacturer stating in both official languages that the vehicle is a competition vehicle and is for use exclusively in clos
36. deployment or iii a Separate plate or label that is permanently affixed in a location referred to in subparagraph i or ii and c in the case of a low speed vehicle multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car three wheeled vehicle or truck having a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less be i composed of characters having a minimum height of 4 mm ii located inside the occupant compartment and iii without any part of such vehicle being removed readable through the vehicle glazing under daylight conditions by an observer having 20 20 vision Snellen whose eyepoint is located outside the vehicle adjacent to the left windshield pillar 2 1 The vehicle identification number of a snowmobile shall a be composed of capital sans serif characters b be sunk into embossed on imprinted on or permanently affixed on the right exterior vertical surface of the track tunnel c be difficult to remove replace or alter without detection d be composed of characters having a minimum height of 4 mm e be legible and indelible f be legible without any part of the vehicle having to be removed and g be protected from corrosion 2 2 At the option of the manufacturer the vehicle identification number may also be displayed in a bar code format that shall meet the requirements of section 5 6 of guideline AIAG B 10 Trading Partner Labels Implementation Guideline February 2000 except for the specifications respecting code density an
37. enters occupies or leaves the vehicle dispositif automatique de protection de l occupant auto transporter means a truck and a trailer designed for use in combination to transport motor vehicles where the truck is designed to carry cargo other than at the fifth wheel and that cargo is to be loaded only by means of the trailer porte autos back door means a door or door system on the back of a motor vehicle through which passengers can enter or leave the vehicle or cargo can be loaded or unloaded but does not include a a trunk lid or b a door or window that is composed entirely of glazing material and whose latches or hinge systems are attached directly to the glazing material porte arri re backup system means a portion of a service brake system such as a pump that automatically supplies energy in the event of a primary brake power source failure syst me de secours battery charging indicator means a device showing whether the battery is being charged or discharged indicateur de charge battery charging tell tale means a signal that when alight indicates that the battery is not being charged t moin de charge beam contributor Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 blister Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 body type means the general configuration or shape of a vehicle distinguished by the number of doors or windows cargo carrying features the roofline e g sedan fastback hatchback or other characterist
38. facing seats 2 Except for vertical movement of non locking suspension type occupant seats in trucks or buses no occupant seat shall change its position adjustment during any application of force referred to in paragraphs 1 a and b 3 Except in the case of a passenger seat in a bus and a seat having a back that is only adjustable for the comfort of the occupant a hinged or folding occupant seat or occupant seat back shall be equipped with a a self locking device for restraining the hinged or folding seat or seat back and b a control for releasing the self locking device 4 Where a designated seating position is immediately behind a seat equipped with the self locking device referred to in subsection 3 the control for releasing the device shall be readily accessible to a the occupant of the seat equipped with the device and b the occupant of the designated seating position immediately behind such seat if access to the control is required in order to allow him to exit from the vehicle 5 The self locking device referred to in subsection 3 shall not release or fail when a in the case of a forward facing seat a forward longitudinal force equal to 20 times the weight of the hinged or folding portion of the seat is applied through the centre of gravity of that portion of the seat b in the case of a rearward facing seat a rearward longitudinal force equal to eight times the weight of the hinged or folding portio
39. gear ratio provides a greater degree of engine braking than the highest speed transmission ratio at speeds below 40 km h 2 On any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission a motor used for the vehicle s propulsion must not be started by setting the ignition switch to the position used to start the motor if the transmission control is in a forward or reverse drive position 2 1 If a passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle truck or three wheeled vehicle has a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less and a transmission control sequence that includes a park position the transmission control must not be capable of shifting from the park position to the forward or reverse drive position while a motor used for the vehicle s propulsion is in use unless the service brake pedal is depressed or the service brakes are otherwise engaged 3 Subject to subsection 5 where the transmission control sequence includes a park position the identification of the transmission control positions and the position selected shall be displayed in at least a single location in view of the driver when a the ignition switch is set to the position where the transmission can be shifted or b the transmission control is not in the park position 4 Subject to subsection 5 if the transmission control sequence does not include a park position the identification of the transmission control positions and the position selected shall be displayed in at le
40. glazing and surrounding window frame in a bus shall be retained by its surrounding structure in a manner that prevents the formation of an opening large enough to admit the passage of a sphere with a diameter of 100 mm 4 inches that is pressed through the opening by a force of 22 N 5 pounds including the weight of the sphere when the window is tested according to the procedure set out in subsection 2 1 2 1 Under the conditions set out in subsections 24 and 25 an increasing force shall be applied to the head form specified in Figure 4 to this section to cause it to move at a velocity of 51 mm per minute 2 in per minute from a point inside the vehicle that is at the centroid of the window glazing in a direction that is outward and perpendicular to the undisturbed surface of the glazing until one of the following occurs a the force equals 5 300 N 1 200 Ib b cracks have developed that penetrate to a depth of at least 80 per cent of the thickness of the glazing and radiate outward from the point of contact of the head form to two or more points at the window frame c the glazing shatters or d the inner surface of the glazing at the centroid has moved perpendicularly to the undisturbed surface of the glazing a distance equal to the square root of the length of the smallest chord along the surface of the glazing passing through the centroid divided by i 1 25 where the distance is measured in centimetres or ii 2 wher
41. gt De Centre Point Detail A Force application test device attachment point Bottom view 23 10 radus 3 diam cotter pin hole pin see note 5 Detail B Locking mechanism 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing not to scale 3 Material Unless otherwise indicated steel mild steel rectangular tubing 50 mm by 75 mm of 3 mm nominal thickness with 6 mm thick force application test device attachment point plate 4 Securely welded construction 5 Pin dimensions overall height 16 mm small diameter height 6 75 mm large diameter 10 mm small diameter 8 mm Figure 7 Side Back and Bottom View of the Static Force Application Test Device for Strength Requirements Test http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 96 de 131 Figure 8 Three dimensional Schematic Views of the Static Force Application Test Device for Strength Requirements Test Legend d centre to centre distance between the bars of a lower universal anchorage system for a given seating position nominal distance of 280 mm D distance between vertical longitudinal planes located midway between the bars of a lower universal anchorage system for a given seating position SgRP seating reference point Notes 1 Drawing not to scale 2 The midpoint of a designated seating position lies in the vertical longitudinal plane that is equidistant fr
42. hot water tanks full and the waste water tanks empty 8 1 The information referred to in subsection 8 may be displayed on a separate label applied to the vehicle beside the compliance label or in a conspicuous or readily accessible location 9 In the case of a limited speed motorcycle and a low speed vehicle a statement in both official languages that the use of the vehicle may be restricted by provincial authorities to certain roads shall appear on the compliance label or on a separate label permanently applied to the vehicle in a conspicuous location 10 Repealed SOR 2000 182 s 2 11 In the case of a model of vehicle in respect of which the Governor in Council has made an exemption order pursuant to section 9 of the Act the compliance label or information label applied to the vehicle as the case may be shall also specify in both official languages a the number and title of the standard in respect of which the exemption has been granted and b the short title of the exemption order 12 and 13 Repealed SOR 2000 182 s 2 SOR 79 940 s 2 SOR 81 455 s 1 SOR 82 482 s 4 SOR 87 660 s 2 SOR 88 268 s 3 SOR 91 528 s 1 SOR 93 146 s 2 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 98 125 s 3 SOR 2000 182 s 2 SOR 2000 304 s 2 SOR 2002 55 ss 4 21 SOR 2003 272 s 4 SOR 2004 250 s 2 SOR 2005 342 s 1 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 258 s 3 VEHICLES MANUFACTURED IN STAGES INCOMPLETE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER S D
43. http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 6 de 131 as the direction of reference H 0 V 0 for photometric measurements and for the design of the installation of a lamp on a vehicle axe H V hardware when used in relation to a seat belt assembly means any metal or rigid plastic part pi ces head impact area means the area described in subsection 201 1 of Schedule IV zone d impact de la t te headlamp means for the purposes of sections 108 and 108 1 of Schedule IV a lamp used to illuminate the road and objects on the road ahead of the vehicle but does not include a fog lamp or a supplementary driving lamp projecteur headlamp assembly means an assembly that consists of one or more headlamps aiming devices headlamp retaining components electrical connectors and mounting brackets and which may include a housing and one or more bulbs montage de projecteur head restraint means a device that limits rearward angular displacement of the occupant s head relative to their torso line appuie t te hearse means a vehicle that contains only one row of occupant seats is designed exclusively for transporting a body and casket and is equipped with features to secure a casket in place during the operation of the vehicle corbillard heavy duty vehicle Repealed SOR 2001 35 s 1 heavy hauler trailer means a trailer that has a brake lines designed to adap
44. in subsection 7 2 of the Act has been made to conform to the Canada motor vehicle safety standards 8 A vehicle that has been determined to conform to the standards prescribed under these Regulations and in respect of which a certificate of conformity has been issued by the registrar of imported vehicles shall bear a label in both official languages that displays at least the following information a the name and address of i the company or individual that imported the vehicle and ii the company or individual that altered the vehicle b the month and year during which the alteration of the vehicle was completed c a statement that all the necessary alterations have been made to make the vehicle conform to the applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations at the time the main assembly of the vehicle was completed d the vehicle identification number and e in the case of a passenger car truck multi purpose passenger vehicle low speed vehicle bus trailer trailer converter dolly motorcycle or three wheeled vehicle i the gross vehicle weight rating of the vehicle expressed in kilograms and ii the gross axle weight rating for each axle of the vehicle expressed in kilograms and listed in order from front to rear 9 The label referred to in subsection 8 shall a be permanently applied i to the same surface as that to which a compliance label referred to in paragraph 3 a is applied or ii wh
45. in the straight ahead position or unlock it ii that locks the steering mechanism in the straight ahead position in the event that the control for the device fails or the power supply to the device terminates and iii that includes in both official languages the information specified in subparagraphs 12 b i and ii on the switch referred in subparagraph i or on a label affixed near that switch 2 Every C dolly shall have a GAWR of 9 100 kg 3 The longitudinal distance on a C dolly measured on the longitudinal centre line from a point aligned with the centre of the coupling to a point aligned with the centre of the axle shall be no greater than 2 m 4 Where the coupling on a C dolly consists of a single component that coupling shall have a a static load rating of i 800 kN in the longitudinal direction and ii 80 KN in the lateral direction and b a static moment rating of 76 2 kN m about the longitudinal axis of the C dolly 5 Where the coupling on a C dolly consists of two metal eyes the two eyes shall a be separated laterally by a distance of 762 mm 2 mm b be equidistant from the longitudinal centre line of the C dolly c have a mounting height of 900 mm 10 mm when the C dolly is not loaded and d each have a static load rating of i 400 kN in the longitudinal direction ii 100 KN in the vertical direction and iii 40 KN in the lateral direction 6 Where a C dolly is tested in accor
46. inspection function to determine that the vehicle has been made to conform to the standard 5 The declaration referred to in paragraph 3 f shall be signed by the person importing the vehicle or that person s duly authorized representative and set out a the class make model and vehicle identification number of the vehicle b the date the vehicle is presented for importation c the name and address of the company or individual importing the vehicle d in the case of a vehicle other than a restricted use motorcycle a snowmobile or a snowmobile cutter where the vehicle bears the compliance labels referred to in paragraph 3 a a statement that the vehicle bears those labels and where required by United States federal laws the vehicle emission control label applied by the company that manufactured the vehicle d 1 in the case of a snowmobile where the snowmobile bears the certification label referred to in paragraph 3 a 1 a statement that the vehicle bears that label e where a vehicle referred to in paragraph d does not bear the labels referred to in that paragraph a statement from each company that manufactured the vehicle or its duly authorized representative that on the date of manufacture the vehicle conformed to the applicable United States federal laws e 1 where a snowmobile does not bear the certification label referred to in paragraph d 1 a statement from the company that manufactured the vehicle or
47. its duly authorized representative that on the date of manufacture the vehicle conformed to the applicable safety standards of the Snowmobile Safety and Certification Committee Inc f where an American compliance label is applied to the vehicle the name of the company that manufactured the vehicle as shown on the label g the month and year during which the main assembly of the vehicle was completed as shown on the American compliance label applied to the vehicle or on the statement by the company that completed the main assembly of the vehicle or by its duly authorized representative and h a statement that the vehicle will be made to conform to all applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations for that class of vehicle and will be taken within 45 days after its importation to an inspection station authorized by the registrar of imported vehicles to carry out an inspection function to determine that a vehicle has been made to conform to the Canada motor vehicle safety standards 6 A declaration and registration shall be made using the form provided by the Minister a in the case of a person referred to in paragraph 3 e at a designated customs office and b in any other case at the nearest customs office that is open for business http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 24 de 131 7 An authorized inspection station shall determine that a vehicle referred to
48. iv corporate balance sheets and income statements for the three fiscal years immediately preceding the filing of the application v a projected balance sheet and income statement for the fiscal year following a denial of the application and vi a discussion of any other hardship to be considered and b a description of the applicant s efforts to conform to the standards from which exemption is sought including i a discussion of other means of conformity that were considered and the reasons for rejecting each of them ii a description of the steps to be taken while the exemption is in effect and the estimated date by which conformity will be achieved through design changes or the termination of the production of non conforming vehicles iii the world production of vehicles manufactured by the company or by the manufacturer of the model that is the subject of the application in the 12 month period beginning two years before the beginning of the period in respect of which the exemption is applied for and iv the total number of vehicles manufactured for or imported into the Canadian market in the 12 month period beginning two years before the beginning of the period in respect of which the exemption is applied for 3 Where the basis of an application for exemption is the development of new safety or emission control features that are equivalent to or superior to those that conform to the prescribed standards the applicant shall i
49. kg erect sitting height of 907 mm plus or minus 3 mn hip sitting breadth of 373 mm plus or minus 18 mm hip sitting circumference of 1067 mm waist sitting circumference of 813 mm plus or minus 15 mm chest depth of 236 mm plus or minus 5 mm and chest circumference of 950 mm plus or minus 15 mm 50 percentile adulte du sexe masculin 50th percentile six year old child means a person having as physical characteristics a mass of 21 5 kg erect sitting height of 645 mm hip sitting breadth of 213 mm hip sitting circumference of 607 mm and waist sitting circumference of 528 mm 50 percentile enfant de six ans 95th percentile adult male means a person having as physical characteristics a mass of 97 5 kg height of 1849 mm erect sitting height of 965 mm normal sitting height of 930 mm hip sitting breadth of 419 mm hip sitting circumference of 1199 mm waist sitting circumference of 1080 mm chest depth of 267 mm chest circumference of 1130 mm knee height of 594 mm popliteal height of 490 mm elbow rest height of 295 mm thigh clearance height of 175 mm buttock to knee length of 640 mm buttock to poples length of 549 mm elbow to elbow breadth of 506 mm and seat breadth of 404 mm 95 percentile adulte du sexe masculin 2 In the case of any bench or split bench seat having more than 1 270 mm of hip room as measured in accordance with sections 6 1 34 6 2 31 and 6 4 27 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions
50. level for a minimum of one second 9 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 8 10 If the zones in which tether anchorages are located overlap and if in the overlap area a user ready tether anchorage is installed that is designed to accept the tether strap hooks of two restraint systems simultaneously both portions of the tether anchorage that are designed to bind with a tether strap hook shall withstand the force referred to in subsection 8 applied to both portions simultaneously 11 If a bench seat in a bus or a row of designated seating positions in another vehicle has more than one user ready tether anchorage and a distance of 400 mm or more measured in accordance with Figure 20 separates the midpoints of adjacent designated seating positions the force referred to in subsection 8 or 10 as the case may be shall be applied simultaneously to each user ready tether anchorage in the manner specified in that subsection 12 The strength requirement tests shall be conducted with the vehicle seat adjusted to its full rearward and full downward position and the seat back in its most upright position http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 77 de 131 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 PERSO SES Eee atatata ste ir Side view LEGEND F7 77 TS TA Surrounding structure if present EX Area in which the tether strap hook interface profile must be wholly located Notes 1 Dimensions in mm
51. loaded for its intended use b ensure that the vehicle conforms to the standards referred to in subsection 5 2 in respect of the work carried out by the company to alter the vehicle and c subject to subsection 2 apply to the vehicle an additional label displaying i the words THIS VEHICLE WAS ALTERED BY CE V HICULE A ETE MODIFI PAR followed by the name of the company that altered the vehicle ii the month and year during which the alteration of the vehicle was completed iii the drawing referred to in paragraph 6 1 c iv in accordance with paragraph 6 1 e the new gross vehicle weight rating and gross axle weight ratings of the vehicle as altered where they differ from those shown on the original compliance label v in accordance with paragraph 6 1 f the type of vehicle where it differs from the type shown on the original compliance label and vi in the case of a multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus manufactured from a cutaway chassis a motor home or a recreational trailer the information referred to in subsection 6 8 2 The drawing referred to in paragraph 1 c may be displayed on a label applied to the vehicle beside the compliance label 3 In the case of a motor home or a recreational trailer the information referred to in subparagraph 1 c vi may be displayed on a separate label applied to the vehicle beside the compliance label or in a conspicuous or readily accessible location
52. may be exposed http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 21 de 131 c have lettering that is i clear and indelible ii indented embossed or in a colour that contrasts with the background colour of the label and iii in block capitals and numerals not less than 2 mm in height and d have metric units identified by the appropriate name or symbol SOR 82 482 s 5 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 6 8 Repealed SOR 2002 55 s 7 ALTERED VEHICLE 9 1 If a company alters a vehicle other than an incomplete vehicle or a truck tractor not fitted with a fifth wheel coupling that was in conformity with these Regulations in such a manner that its stated GVWR and GAWR are no longer accurate or if the company alters the vehicle otherwise than by the addition substitution or removal of readily attachable components such as mirrors or tire and rim assemblies or by minor finishing operations the company shall a ensure that the compliance label and information label if applicable remain on the vehicle a 1 respect the gross axle weight ratings and gross vehicle weight rating of the vehicle recommended by the original manufacturer or where the company increases the ratings ensure that they are i increased in accordance with the original manufacturer s written recommendations or ii within the load carrying capacity of the vehicle s components when the altered vehicle is
53. means a for the purposes of paragraphs 7 a and b the force applied by means of the upper loading bar and the forward http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 115 de 131 travel distance of the pivot attachment point of the upper loading bar measured from the point at which the initial application of 44 5 N 10 pounds of force is attained and b for the purposes of paragraph 7 f the force applied by means of the upper loading bar and the forward and rearward travel distance of the pivot attachment point of the upper loading bar measured from the position at which the initial application of 44 5 N 10 pounds of force is attained 8 Where a school bus passenger seat that has another seat behind it is subjected to rearward performance tests as specified in the test methods referred to in subsection 2 a the seat back force shall not exceed 9 876 N 2 200 pounds as determined from the force deflection curve b the seat back deflection shall not exceed 250 mm 10 inches as determined by the force deflection curve c the seat shall not deflect by an amount such that any part of the seat moves to within 100 mm four inches of any part of another school bus passenger seat in its originally installed position d the seat shall not separate from the vehicle at any attachment point e the seat components shall not separate at any attachment point and f the energy
54. means the basic steering mechanism and its associated trim hardware including any portion of a steering column assembly that provides energy absorption upon impact syst me de commande de la direction steering shaft means a component that transmits steering torque from the steering wheel to the steering gear arbre de direction stickiness Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 stopping distance means the distance travelled by a vehicle from the point at which force is applied to the brake control to the point at which the vehicle reaches a full stop distance d arr t strap means a narrow band of non woven material used in a seat belt assembly in place of webbing courroie suspension spring means a leaf coil torsion bar rubber air bag and every other type of spring used in vehicular suspensions ressort de suspension tell tale means an optical signal that when alight indicates the actuation of a device correct or defective functioning or condition or failure to function t moin tether belt hook Repealed SOR 98 457 s 1 tether strap means a device that is fitted with a tether strap hook and secured to the rigid structure of a restraint system and that transfers the load from that system to the user ready tether anchorage courroie d attache tether strap hook means a device that has an interface profile shown in Figure 1 of section 210 1 of Schedule IV and is used to attach a tether strap to a user read
55. measurements made on its reflective surface at least 6 mm 0 25 inch from the edge of the image display Passenger Cars and Three wheeled Vehicles SOR 2003 272 s 13 7 An inside rearview mirror shall be installed on every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle and shall under the conditions prescribed in subsection 8 a provide the driver with a field of view to the rear that i is not less than 20 measured horizontally rearward from the projected eye point and ii extends to the horizon and includes a point on the road surface not more than 60 m 200 feet directly behind the vehicle or b where the inside rearview mirror does not provide the field of view to the rear described in paragraph a be accompanied on the side opposite the driver s side by an outside rearview mirror that has not less than 90 per cent of the reflective surface area of an outside rearview mirror installed pursuant to subsection 11 8 For the purposes of subsection 7 the vehicle shall be on a level road surface and loaded with the lighter of the following loads calculated on the basis of the driver and each occupant weighing 68 kg 150 pounds a a driver and four other occupants and b an occupant in each designated seating position 9 A field of view to the rear described in paragraph 7 a may be partially obscured by seated occupants or head restraints 10 An inside rearview mirror referred to in subsection 7 if sit
56. motor tricycles equipped with passenger car tires and every tire rim manufactured for use on those vehicles shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 120 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of More Than 4 536 kg TSD 120 as amended from time to time Technical Standards Document No 120 2 In addition to the requirements set out in section S5 1 3 of TSD 120 used or retreaded tires installed on a bus trailer trailer converter dolly or truck shall a not have been the subject of a notice of defect b have a tread depth greater than 1 5 mm and c have been originally manufactured to comply with i in the case of used tires the requirements of the Motor Vehicle Tire Safety Regulations 1995 and ii in the case of retreaded tires Schedule V to the Motor Vehicle Tire Safety Regulations 1995 the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 119 or the Japanese Industrial Standard JIS D4230 3 The label information specified in section S5 3 of TSD 120 shall be in both official languages 4 The following definitions apply for the purposes of TSD 120 load rating means the maximum load a tire is rated to carry at a given inflation pressure charge nominale maximum load rating means the load rating at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire limite de charge nominale Load Range Identification Symbol 5 In the case of vehicles equipped with light truc
57. national safety mark and the authorization number are applied at the following premises identification of the premises This ministerial authorization expires on Issued in Ottawa on CG 20 for the Minister of Transport Infrastructure and Communities SOR 95 147 s 4 SOR 2008 104 s 6 SCHEDULE III Subsections 2 1 4 1 and 5 2 CANADA MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS Column Column Il Column Ill Classes of Vehicles http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Item CMVSS Description Bus Location and Identification of Controls and Displays Transmission Control Functions Windshield Defrosting and Defogging Windshield Wiping and Washing System Motorcycle Restricted use Multi purpose Passenger Passenger Car Snow Snow mobile mobile Cutter P gina 28 de 131 Vehicle Imported Trailer Temporarily Low Three Converter for Special speed wheeled Trailer Dolly Truck Purposes Vehicle Vehicle Hydraulic and Electric Brake Systems 106 Brake Hoses Lighting System and Retroreflective Devices x Alternative Requirements for Headlamps Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of 4 536 kg or Less Hood Latch System x Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention Vehicle Identification Number Hydraulic Brake Fluids Power Operated Window Partition and Roof Panel Syst
58. normal stowed position 19 The tell tale referred to in subsection 16 shall display the identification symbol for the seat belt set out in Table II to section 101 Release Mechanisms 20 The release mechanism of a seat belt assembly shall be accessible in both the stowed and operational positions to the occupant of the seat and shall by a single push button action a release the seat belt assembly at a single point and b release both the pelvic restraint and the upper torso restraint simultaneously Crash Protection Requirements 21 Every passenger car and every truck bus or multi purpose passenger vehicle that has a GVWR of 3 856 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2 495 kg or less other than a vehicle manufactured for operation by persons with disabilities shall comply with the crash protection requirements set out in subsection 22 21 1 Every three wheeled vehicle shall at the option of the manufacturer either comply with the crash test requirements set out in subsection 22 or display on one or more labels permanently affixed in view of the front seat occupants in letters of not less than six points in height the following statement This vehicle does not comply with the requirements of the dynamic crash test set out in CMVSS 208 Ce v hicule n est pas conforme aux exigences de l essai de collision dynamique pr vu par la NSVAC 208 21 2 If the label referred to in subsection 21 1 is displayed i
59. outboard designated seating position i in the case of such a designated seating position with an air bag that may be deactivated by means of a manual cut off switch not to install a rearward facing child restraint system or infant restraint system in that designated seating position unless the air bag is deactivated and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 71 de 131 ii in any other case not to install a rearward facing child restraint system or infant restraint system in that designated seating position and b not to sit unnecessarily close to the air bag 28 Where a vehicle is equipped at a designated seating position with an air bag the English and French versions of the owner s manual shall include a if scheduled maintenance or replacement of the air bag is required instructions concerning the maintenance or replacement b a description of the air bag c the warnings set out in subsection 27 d the warning not to place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and the occupant and e if the vehicle is equipped with a manual air bag cut off switch i instructions concerning the operation of the cut off switch ii a statement that the cut off switch is installed only for use when a rearward facing child restraint system or infant restraint system is installed in the right front outboard designated seating position and iii a warning about
60. re gi ke Do 1 Framed areas of the symbol may be solid 4 La partie encadr e du symbole peut tre pleine 2 Outline may be used alone 2 est permis d utiliser seulement le contour 3 Symbol not required if function is combined with 3 Le symbole n est pas n cessaire si la commande est master lighting switch coupl e au commutateur g n ral d clairage TABLE Il TABLEAU II IDENTIFICATION OF DISPLAYS IDENTIFICATION DES AFFICHAGES Display Tell tale Tell tale Colour Identification Couleur du t moin du t moin Affichage Headlamp upper beam BLUE 5 Faisceaux route des projecteurs GREEN Turn signals Feux d avertissement Ceinture de s curit Fuel level i eal Engine oil pressure Do Pression d huile du moteur Hazard warning signal Seat belt Engine coolant temperature Temp rature du liquide de refroidissement Battery charging condition Charge de la batterie Brake system malfunction ROUGE 5 Mauvais fonctionnement du syst me de freinage Air brake low pressure ROUGE 5 Basse pression des freins air comprim Antilock brake system YELLOW JAUNE Mauvais fonctionnement du malfunction dispositif de frein anti blocage Variable brake proportioning YELLOW Manufacturer s option JAUNE Mauvais fonctionnement du system malfunction 6 choix du fabricant compensateur de freinage 6 Parking brake applied 8 Manufacturer s option ROUGE 5 Frein de stationnement appliqu choix du fabr
61. readout display Repealed SOR 93 31 s 1 initial brake temperature Repealed SOR 99 357 s 1 inspector Repealed SOR 95 147 s 1 integral headlamp aiming device Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 7 de 131 intermediate manufacturer means a company other than an incomplete vehicle manufacturer or final stage manufacturer that performs manufacturing operations on an incomplete vehicle fabricant interm diaire IRHD Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 leaded gasoline means gasoline that contains more than a 0 06 grams of lead per Imperial gallon 0 013 grams per litre or b 0 006 grams of phosphorous per Imperial gallon 0 0013 grams per litre essence au plomb light duty vehicle Repealed SOR 2001 35 s 1 lightly loaded vehicle weight Repealed SOR 99 357 s 1 light source Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 light truck tire or LT tire means a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multi purpose passenger vehicles pneu pour camion l ger limited speed motorcycle means a motorcycle that a has steering handlebars that are completely constrained from rotating in relation to the axle of only one wheel in contact with the ground b has a maximum speed of 70 km h or less measured in accordance with International Organization for Standardization standard ISO 7117 19
62. restrain a child no built in child restraint system shall have a fixed or movable surface that a is directly in front of the child or b may come into contact with the child when the system is in use 10 Each horizontal cross section of each built in child restraint system surface that is designed to restrain forward movement of the child s torso shall be flat or concave and each vertical longitudinal cross section shall be flat or convex with a radius of curvature of the underlying structure of not less than 50 mm 2 inches 11 No portion of a rigid structural component within or underlying a contactable surface of a built in child restraint system or a built in booster cushion shall with any padding or other flexible overlay material removed have a height of more than 9 5 mm 3 8 inch above any immediately adjacent restraint system surface or any exposed edge with a radius of less than 6 4 mm 1 4 inch 12 The webbing of belts that are provided with a built in child restraint system and used to restrain a child within the system shall a after being subjected to abrasion as specified in section S5 3 c of TSD 209 have a breaking strength of not less than 75 per cent of the strength of the unabraded webbing b meet the requirements of sections S4 2 e and f of TSD 209 and subsections 209 4 to 7 of Schedule IV to these Regulations and c if contactable by the torso of the anthropometric test device when the system is
63. retention test described in subsection 2 1 every school bus emergency door shall be capable of being manually released by one person from inside and outside the bus using a force not exceeding 180 N 40 Ib that is applied a within the access region for high forces shown in Figure 3B to this section for a side emergency exit door and in Figure 3D to this section for a rear emergency exit door b in any direction from outside the bus or c in an upward direction from inside the bus 16 Every school bus emergency door release mechanism shall be capable of being operated without the use of remote controls or tools and shall function independently of the vehicle s power system 17 Every emergency exit of a bus other than an emergency door required by subsection 9 shall after the release mechanism has been operated be capable of being opened outward manually by an occupant using the force applications described in subsection 13 to a position providing an opening large enough to allow the unobstructed passage of the ellipsoid described in paragraph 8 b 18 Under the conditions set out in subsections 24 and 26 both before and after the window retention test described in subsection 2 1 every emergency exit door of a school bus shall after the release mechanism has been http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 105 de 131 operated be capable of being opened out
64. shall be equipped with a rear impact guard that meets the configuration requirements of subsections 5 to 8 as well as the applicable test requirements of subsections 9 to 12 when tested in accordance with Test Method 223 Rear Impact Guard December 2003 4 Until September 1 2007 instead of being equipped with a rear impact guard in accordance with subsection 3 at the option of the manufacturer who installs the rear impact guard a trailer may be equipped with a rear impact guard that is installed in accordance with Technical Standards Document No 224 Rear Impact Protection as amended from time to time and labelled in accordance with section 571 223 of the Code of Federal Regulations of the United States Title 49 revised as of October 1 2000 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS 5 The horizontal member of a rear impact guard shall have a cross sectional vertical height of at least 100 mm at any point across the guard width when installed on a trailer 6 The outermost surfaces of the horizontal member shall extend outboard to within 100 mm of the longitudinal vertical planes that are tangent to the side extremities but shall not extend outboard of those planes 7 When the trailer is resting on level ground unloaded with its full capacity of fuel its tires inflated and its air suspension if so equipped pressurized in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations the ground clearance shall not exceed 560 mm at any poi
65. tested dynamically have a width of http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 100 de 131 not less than 38 mm 11 2 inches when measured as specified in section S5 1 a of TSD 209 13 Every belt buckle and item of belt adjustment hardware used in a built in child restraint system shall conform to the requirements of sections S4 3 a 1 and 2 and S4 3 b and g of TSD 209 14 Any buckle of a built in child restraint system belt assembly that is designed to restrain a child shall in accordance with Test Method 213 4 Built In Child Restraint Systems and Built In Booster Cushions January 2007 a before dynamic testing i not release when a force of less than 40 N 9 pounds is applied and ii release where a force of 40 N 9 pounds to 62 N 14 pounds is applied b after dynamic testing release where a force of not more than 71 N 16 pounds is applied and c have a push button to be used for applying the release force with a minimum surface area of 385 mm 0 6 square inch and with a minimum linear dimension of 10 mm 0 4 inch 15 Every belt that is part of a built in child restraint system and that is designed to restrain the child a shall be adjustable to snugly fit any child whose height and weight are within the ranges recommended in accordance with paragraph 17 a and who is positioned in the system in accordance with the instructions required by subsectio
66. that when alight indicates that the oil pressure in the engine lubrication circuit is below the normal operating limit prescribed by the manufacturer t moin de pression d huile on highway vehicle Repealed SOR 2004 250 s 1 on off highway vehicle Repealed SOR 2004 250 s 1 open body type vehicle means a vehicle that has no top over the occupant compartment or that has a top over the occupant compartment that can be installed or removed by the operator of the vehicle v hicule de type ouvert open motorcycle means a motorcycle that a has steering handlebars that are completely constrained from rotating in relation to the axle of only one wheel in contact with the ground b is designed to travel on two wheels in contact with the ground c has a minimum seat height when the vehicle is unladen of 650 mm and d does not have a structure partially or fully enclosing the driver and passenger other than that part of the vehicle forward of the driver s torso and the seat backrest motocyclette sans habitacle ferm optically combined lamps means for the purposes of section 108 of Schedule IV lamps that have a two or more separate light sources or a single light source that operates in different ways b one lens totally or partly in common and c acommon lamp body feux combin s optiquement optional item Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 outboard designated seating position means a designated seatin
67. the driver s eye position a field of view that includes continuous and complete views as illustrated in Figure 1 i rearward ii of the ground which view overlaps the field of view provided by the unit magnification mirror described in subsection 18 iii of the side of the bus iv in the mirror installed on the side opposite the driver s side of cylinders B and D placed in accordance with subsection 25 and v in the mirror installed on the driver s side of cylinders C and E placed in accordance with subsection 25 b have an average radius of curvature of not less than 482 mm 19 inches and c have a radius of curvature that does not deviate at any point by more than 12 5 per cent from the average of any five radius of curvature measurements taken at least 6 mm 0 25 inch from the edge of the reflective surface 20 Each System B mirror shall be installed so that a the distance from the driver s eye position to the centre of the mirror is at least 95 25 cm 37 5 inches and b the slope of the mirror surface has no discontinuities 21 Each System B mirror shall provide a field of view that includes continuous and complete views at the driver s eye position as illustrated in Figure 1 of a the ground from the front bumper forward to a point where direct observation of the ground is possible b the ground and the side of the bus rearward of the front bumper extending to and overlapping the fiel
68. the safety consequences of using the cut off switch in circumstances other than those referred to in subparagraph ii Tension relieving Devices 29 Where a vehicle that has a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less is equipped at a designated seating position with a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that has a tension relieving device that permits the introduction of slack in the webbing of the upper torso restraint the vehicle shall be equipped with a means that automatically cancels any slack in that webbing when a the latch plate is released or b one of the following doors is opened namely i the vehicle door closest to that position where the assembly is at a front outboard designated seating position or a rear outboard designated seating position and ii either vehicle door that normally enables an occupant of the seating position to exit the vehicle where the assembly is at any other designated seating position 30 The English and French versions of the owner s manual for a vehicle referred to in subsection 29 shall a explain the functioning of the tension relieving device b state the maximum amount of slack in millimetres that is recommended by the manufacturer to be introduced into the upper torso restraint under normal conditions of use and c warn that the introduction of slack beyond the recommended amount could significantly reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt assembly in the event of an impact 31 Notwi
69. they may be displayed in one official language only 9 The symbols and abbreviations used to identify the controls and displays of a motorcycle shall be provided in writing in the English and French versions of the owner s manual accompanied by a full explanation 10 Despite the requirements of item 8 of Table 3 to TSD 123 a speedometer fitted on a motorcycle shall be http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 62 de 131 calibrated in kilometres per hour or in kilometres per hour and miles per hour Digital speedometers that switch between kilometres per hour and miles per hour are permitted if the unit of measure is identified 11 In the case of analogue speedometer displays the kilometre per hour scale on the speedometer shall increase in a clockwise direction Major graduations and numerals shall appear at 10 or 20 kilometre per hour intervals and minor graduations at 5 or 10 kilometre per hour intervals 12 An odometer or trip odometer installed on a motorcycle adjacent to the speedometer shall display distances in the same unit of measure as that of the predominant speedometer scale If the odometer or trip odometer is not adjacent to the speedometer or switches between kilometres and miles independently of the speedometer the odometer or trip odometer shall display distances in kilometres or miles and shall identify the unit of measure used 13 Section S5 2 4 of TSD 123 does n
70. to every trailer that is designed to carry cargo with a GVWR of 10 000 kg or more a load carrying mainframe and loading deck and no permanent sides or roof such as a flatbed trailer heavy hauler trailer industrial trailer lowbed trailer or drop centre trailer 3 Every trailer shall for the purpose of affixing cargo be equipped with at least the number of cargo anchoring devices determined in accordance with the formula N M 2 000 kg where N is the minimum number of cargo anchoring devices rounded up to the next even whole number and M is the cargo carrying capacity of the trailer calculated as the difference between its gross vehicle weight rating and its curb mass expressed in kilograms 4 The minimum number of cargo anchoring devices determined in accordance with subsection 3 shall when tested in accordance with Test Method 905 Trailer Cargo Anchoring Devices August 1998 withstand a force of at least 67 000 N applied in an upward vertical direction SOR 98 595 s 2 SNOWMOBILE TRAILERS STANDARD 906 906 Every snowmobile trailer shall be equipped with a one or more tie down cross bars located in such a manner as to be capable of clamping the skis of as many snowmobiles as the trailer is capable of carrying and b tie down points to which each snowmobile can be secured by ropes or straps and that are of sufficient strength to withstand a force of 2 224 11 N 500 pounds applied separately from any direction to
71. two lower beams d conform to i paragraphs 5 1 2 5 5 9 S7 4 9 and h S7 8 2 7 8 2 1 a and b 7 8 2 2 S7 8 3 S7 8 4 and S7 8 5 1 c of TSD 108 and ii subsections 108 29 and if applicable 30 e comply with sections 5 1 2 5 1 4 and if applicable 5 1 6 of SAE Standard J580 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly December 1986 f are fitted with bulbs that conform to i a document referred to in paragraph 108 5 a or the information provided pursuant to paragraph 108 5 b and ii paragraphs S7 7 of TSD 108 except that the DOT symbol referred to in paragraphs S7 7 a and e 7 is not required and g when activated in a steady burning state do not have any styling ornament or other feature such as a translucent cover or grill in front of the lens 2 As an alternative to the headlamps required by section 108 motorcycles may be equipped with headlamps that emit white light and that a provide one upper beam and one lower beam or two upper beams and two lower beams b comply with i subparagraphs 1 a i to iii and v and paragraphs 1 b and a to f ii ECE Regulation No 57 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Headlamps for Motor Cycles and Vehicles Treated as Such as amended from time to time iii ECE Regulation No 72 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Cycle Headlamps Emitting an Asymmetrical Passing Beam and a Driving Beam and Equipped with Haloge
72. vehicle and a may contain contemporary design components b has a motor that produces 8 kW 10 73 bhp or less c is intended for use exclusively in parades exhibitions and demonstrations and d bears a label permanently affixed in a conspicuous position stating that the vehicle is not to be used for public transportation but is intended for use in parades exhibitions and demonstrations r plique d ancien mod le antique vehicle means a vehicle more than 30 years old that when restored to a condition comparable to that on the date of its manufacture retains the original components or incorporates replacement components with original design characteristics ancien mod le approved means approved by the Minister approuv armour Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 assembler Repealed SOR 95 147 s 1 ASTM means the American Society for Testing Materials ASTM attachment hardware means the hardware designed for securing the webbing of a seat belt assembly to a vehicle pi ces de fixation automatic locking retractor means a retractor incorporating adjustment hardware that has a positive self locking mechanism that is capable when locked of withstanding restraint forces r tracteur autobloquant automatic occupant protection system means a protective restraining system for an occupant of a vehicle that does not require any deliberate action on the part of the occupant to be activated where that occupant
73. vehicle but apart 5 The words Voir le manuel de l usager pour plus de renseignements of the French version of the information specified in section S4 3 f of TSD 110 may at the option of the manufacturer be replaced by the words Voir le guide du propri taire pour plus de renseignements Voir le manuel du propri taire pour plus de renseignements or Voir le guide de l automobiliste pour plus de renseignements 6 The information specified in section 84 3 3 of TSD 110 shall be in both official languages 7 The following definitions apply for the purposes of TSD 110 load rating means the maximum load a tire is rated to carry at a given inflation pressure charge nominale maximum load rating means the load rating at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire limite de charge http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 46 de 131 nominale rim base means that portion of a rim remaining after removal of all split or continuous rim flanges side rings and locking rings that can be detached from the rim base de jante Load Range Identification Symbol 8 In the case of vehicles equipped with light truck tires the load range identification symbol shall appear on the compliance label required by section 6 of these Regulations or after the tire size designation on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label Compliance 9 Until
74. words required to be displayed under S5 3 5 of TSD 105 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 39 de 131 a in the cases referred to in S5 3 5 c 1 A B and D of TSD 105 may be replaced or accompanied by a symbol that conforms to the colour requirements of subsection 101 9 1 of this Schedule and b shall be displayed in both official languages if not accompanied by a symbol 4 Despite 5 3 and S5 3 5 c 1 C of TSD 105 if a separate indicator is used to indicate a malfunction in an antilock brake system the indicator shall display the corresponding symbol shown in Table Il to section 101 of this Schedule 5 The statement set out in S5 4 3 of TSD 105 may be replaced by another statement to the same effect 6 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 79 374 s 3 SOR 80 637 s 1 SOR 86 683 s 3 SOR 86 976 s 3 SOR 91 144 s 1 SOR 96 89 s 2 SOR 97 200 ss 4 6 SOR 97 421 s 5 SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 99 357 s 3 SOR 2001 35 s 4 SOR 2005 42 s 13 SOR 2008 104 s 11 SOR 2009 79 s 1 BRAKE HOSES STANDARD 106 SOR 93 561 S 3 106 1 Every brake hose brake hose assembly and brake hose end fitting with which a passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle truck bus low speed vehicle three wheeled vehicle and enclosed motorcycle are equipped shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 106 Brake Hoses TSD 106 a
75. 1 kg v hicule a basse vitesse make means the name that a manufacturer applies to a group of vehicles marque manual seat belt assembly means with respect to a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly an assembly that requires a deliberate action on the part of the occupant of a vehicle to be activated ceinture de s curit manuelle manufacturer Repealed SOR 95 147 s 1 master lighting switch means a switch with one or more operational positions that controls the tail lamps parking lamp licence plate lamp side marker lamps and headlamps and may control identification lamps and clearance lamps http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 8 de 131 commutateur g n ral d clairage maximum load Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 maximum loaded vehicle mass Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 minibike Repealed SOR 88 268 s 1 Minister means the Minister of Transport ministre mobile home means a vehicle that is more than 102 inches in overall width and that is designed to be drawn behind another vehicle and to be used as a living or working accommodation unit maison roulante mobility impaired occupant means a person whose mass is 9 kg or more and who for orthopaedic reasons or because of the person s build or other physical characteristics is unable to use a child restraint system or a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt occupant a mobilit r duite model me
76. 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print zone Drawing not to scale R Point Shoulder reference point O O1 BR Figure 5 Plan View R plane Cross Section User ready Tether Anchorage Location Median plane un R Point W Point V Point 20 measured along vertical plane through R Point Notes V Point V reference point 350 mm vertically above and 175 mm horizontally back from H point W Point W reference point 50 mm vertically below and 50 mm horizontally back from R Point Area view along torso reference line plane Pagina 81 de 131 1 Portion of user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook to be located within shaded zone Drawing not to scale R Point Shoulder reference point ak wn Figure 6 Front View User ready Tether Anchorage Location http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en V Point V reference point 350 mm vertically above and 175 mm horizontally back from H point W Point W reference point 50 mm vertically below and 50 mm horizontally back from R Point 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 82 de 131 RY Plane cross section Notes 1 Portion of user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook to be located within shaded zone 2 Drawing not to scale 3 R Point Shoulder reference point 4 V Point V reference point 350 m
77. 160 s 1 SOR 98 457 s 1 SOR 98 524 s 1 F SOR 99 357 s 1 SOR 2000 182 s 1 SOR 2000 304 s 1 SOR 2001 35 s 1 SOR 2001 117 s 1 SOR 2001 152 s 1 SOR 2002 15 s 25 F SOR 2002 55 s 1 SOR 2002 187 s 1 SOR 2002 205 s 1 SOR 2003 57 s 3 F SOR 2003 272 s 1 SOR 2004 250 s 1 SOR 2005 45 s 1 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 1 SOR 2008 72 s 1 SOR 2008 73 s 1 SOR 2008 104 s 1 SOR 2008 229 s 1 SOR 2008 258 s 1 2 1 Where in the application to a vehicle of a portion of a section of these Regulations or a portion of a provision of a http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 15 de 131 technical standards document either the metric or the imperial system of measurement is used the same system of measurement shall be used in the application to the vehicle of any other portion of the section or provision SOR 79 263 s 1 SOR 82 482 s 1 SOR 96 366 s 2 2 2 For the purpose of determining the number of wheels on a vehicle two wheels are considered to be one wheel if they are mounted on the same axle and the distance between the centres of their areas of contact with the ground is less than 460 mm SOR 2003 272 s 2 NATIONAL SAFETY MARKS 3 Any company that intends to apply a national safety mark to a vehicle shall apply to the Minister to obtain an authorization in the form set out in Schedule II SOR 79 491 s 1 SOR 82 482 s 2
78. 7 s 3 SOR 94 291 s 4 SOR 94 692 s 2 SOR 97 201 s 5 SOR 97 421 s 17 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2009 121 s 2 STEERING COLUMN REARWARD DISPLACEMENT 204 1 Every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle and every multi purpose passenger vehicle bus and truck other than a walk in van with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle mass of 2 495 kg or less shall be tested a by impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at 90 5 to the line of travel of the vehicle while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h and b in accordance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 208 23 a and c 2 During the test referred to in subsection 1 the upper end of the steering column and steering shaft shall not be displaced more than 127 mm in a horizontal rearward direction parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle in relation to an undisturbed point in the vehicle The displacement shall be equivalent to the maximum dynamic movement of the upper end of the steering column and steering shaft during the test SOR 80 440 s 2 SOR 83 138 s 4 SOR 90 387 s 1 SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 97 201 s 5 SOR 97 421 s 22 F SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 72 s 5 SOR 2009 121 s 2 GLAZING MATERIALS 205 1 For the purposes of this section bus motorhome multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car readily removable windows trailer an
79. 8 em gt 1180 34 emb t pera cm SJ SINCHES 12 7 emt E o SINCHES 112 7 ern POSSIBLE ARMREST ADJACENT SEAT ADIACENT SEAT LOOR BENEATH EMERGENCY EXIT FLOOR BENEATH EMERGENCY EXIT VIEW PARALLEL TO SEAT BACK VIEW PERPENDICULAR TO SEAT BACK CLEARANCE AREA AROUND ACCESS REGION IS THE SPATIAL VOLUME CREATED SEAT BACK ARM NESTS BY THE INTERSECTION OF THE PROJECTIONS OF THE AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS AREAS PIONIN IN THE TWO eee FIGURE 1 LOW FORCE ACCESS REGION FOR EMERGENCY EXITS HAVING ADJACENT SEATS nte 73 INCHES 18 42 ems aten ida ion wee ae E Nu NEGION A T REGION 4 REGIONA ANNS N g NN NE NAN Ro PE Ta ees SX WS Kr Ba SG POINT OF NS N DIMENSION Ne em mt jm qe 15 08 cen Fe SINCHES 12 Fem 1192 08 em 5 INCHES 12 7 cm POSSIBLE ADJACENT SEAT ARM REST ADJACENT SEAT FLOOR BENEATH EMERGENCY EXIT FLOOR BENEATH EMERGENCY EXIT VIEW PARALLEL TO SEAT BACK VIEW PERPENDICULAR TO SEAT BACK CLEARANCE AHEA AROUND SEAT BACK ARS RESTS AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS FIGURE 2 HIGH FORCE ACCESS REGIONS FOR EMERGENCY EXITS HAVING ADJACENT SEATS http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print ACCESS ALGIO FOR HIGH FORCES FE ONoMES 122 OR em INSIDE CEILING JA ROOF EMERGE Ly Ext http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 2 el 4ES 1189 34 em P
80. 81 Road vehicles measurement method for the maximum speed of motorcycles c has a minimum seat height when the vehicle is unladen of 650 mm and d does not have a structure partially or fully enclosing the driver and passenger other than that part of the vehicle forward of the driver s torso and the seat backrest motocyclette a vitesse limit e line means the name that a manufacturer applies to a family of vehicles within a make that have a degree of commonality of body chassis cab type or other features of construction ligne liquefied petroleum gas or LPG means a hydrocarbon product that meets National Standard of Canada CAN CGSB 3 14 M88 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Propane August 1988 gaz de p trole liqu fi ouGPL load divider dolly means a trailer that consists of a trailer chassis and one or more axles with no solid bed body or container attached and that is designed exclusively to support a portion of the load on a trailer or truck excluded from all the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 121 Air Brake Systems chariot de r partition de charge load limiter means a seat belt assembly component or seat belt assembly feature that controls tension on a seat belt to modulate the forces that are imparted to an occupant who is restrained by the seat belt assembly during a collision limiteur de charge lower connector system means a system consisting of two connectors that each fit insid
81. 9 part 581 of the Code of Federal Regulations of the United States revised as of October 1 2006 2 Until August 31 2009 a passenger car may conform either to the requirements of this section in its current version or as it read before the coming into force of these Regulations 3 A passenger car shall conform to the requirements of this section as of September 1 2009 SOR 79 338 s 1 SOR 79 940 s 8 SOR 91 692 s 5 SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 97 421 s 22 F SOR 2008 199 s 1 ROOF INTRUSION PROTECTION http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 103 de 131 216 No truck multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus except a school bus that has a gross vehicle weight rating of 2 722 kg or less and no passenger car except a convertible vehicle shall when tested on the left side and on the right side of the roof of the vehicle in accordance with Test Method 216 Roof Intrusion Protection September 15 2000 sustain an intrusion into the roof of more than 127 mm in depth as measured in accordance with section 3 8 4 of the Test Method SOR 94 291 s 5 SOR 2000 402 s 1 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E BUS WINDOW RETENTION RELEASE AND EMERGENCY EXITS 217 1 Subsections 2 and 2 1 do not apply to a windshield or a window of a size such that the length of the smallest chord along the surface of the glazing passing through the centroid is less than 200 mm 8 in 2 Every window
82. August 31 2009 the motor vehicles and tire rims referred to in subsection 1 may conform to the requirements of this section as it read on the day before the day on which this version of the section came into force Expiry Date 10 This section expires on August 1 2013 Optional 1 a p n x gall Alphanumeric 0 51 x 0 55 Yellow Text on Black Background or Identifier Black Text on Yellow Background or Barcode PD SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 a The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE FRONT P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi REAR P19570R14 200 kPa 29 psi T12570D15 420 kPa 60 psi 367DAO3E415503870 Red Border Yellow Text on Black Background or Black Text on Yellow Background For trailers this statement should read The weight of cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs Figure 1 Vehicle Placard Unilingual English Example http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 47 de 131 13 mm x 14 mm Identificateur 0 51 po x 0 55 po alphanum rique Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou ou code barres texte en noir sur fond jaune optionnel Ter NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 AVANT 2 ARRIERE 3 Le poids total des occupants amp du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX lb pneu Jomensons RESORTS PNEUS A FROID Text
83. ELED VEHICLES OF 1 520 MM OR MORE BUT LESS THAN 1 630 MM OVERALL WIDTH Column Column Il Column III Column IV Column V Column VI Minimum Percentage to be Angle in degrees Area wiped Left Right Up Down Ass 80 17 51 8 5 B si 94 13 49 4 3 Coisa 99 7 15 3 1 TABLE III PASSENGER CARS AND THREE WHEELED VEHICLES OF 1 630 MM OR MORE BUT LESS THAN 1 730 MM OVERALL WIDTH Column Column Il Column III Column IV Column V Column VI Minimum Percentage to be Angle in degrees Area wiped Left Right Up Down Aleck 80 17 53 9 5 Bos 94 14 51 5 3 Cheick 99 8 15 4 1 TABLE IV PASSENGER CARS AND THREE WHEELED VEHICLES OF 1 730 MM OR MORE OVERALL WIDTH Column Column Il Column III Column IV Column V Column VI Minimum Percentage to be Angle in degrees Area wiped Left Right Up Down sus 80 18 56 10 5 B 94 14 53 5 3 Cr 99 10 15 5 1 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 97 264 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 21 SOR 2003 272 s 9 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 104 s 10 HYDRAULIC AND ELECTRIC BRAKE SYSTEMS STANDARD 105 105 1 Subject to section 135 every motor vehicle shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 105 Hydraulic and Electric Brake Systems TSD 105 as amended from time to time 2 Despite 5 3 and S5 3 5 b of TSD 105 if a common indicator is used the indicator shall display the symbol referred to in subsection 101 9 of this Schedule for brake system malfunction 3 Despite S5 3 of TSD 105 the
84. Engine Antifreezes and Antirusts ASTM D 1123 59 Standard Method of Test for Water in Concentrated Engine Antifreezes by the lodine Reagent Method ASTM D 1193 70 Standard Specifications for Reagent Water ASTM D 1415 68 Standard Method of Test for International Hardness of Vulcanized Natural and Synthetic Rubbers ASTM D 2515 66 Standard Specification for Kinematic Glass Viscometers ASTM E 1 68 Specifications for ASTM Thermometers ASTM E 77 66 Verification and Calibration of Liquid in Glass Thermometers ASTM E 298 68 Standard Methods for Assay of Organic Peroxides 3 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 93 561 s 6 SOR 97 421 s 21 F SOR 2007 180 s 7 Column 2 ASTM D 445 06 Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity ASTM D 1287 91 reapproved in 2002 Standard Test Method for pH of Engine Coolants and Antirusts ASTM D 1123 99 reapproved in 2003 Standard Test Methods for Water in Engine Coolant Concentrate by the Karl Fischer Reagent Method ASTM D 1193 99 Standard Specification for Reagent Water ASTM D 1415 06 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property International Hardness ASTM D 446 06 Standard Specifications and Operating Instructions for Glass Capillary Kinematic Viscometers ASTM E 1 05 Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid in Glass Thermome
85. February 2001 in a passenger car truck or multi purpose passenger vehicle having a GVWR of less than 4 536 kg the seat shall be deemed to contain not less than three designated seating positions unless the seat design or vehicle design is such that the centre position is not capable of being used as a seating position SOR 78 257 s 1 SOR 78 351 s 1 SOR 78 525 s 1 SOR 79 306 s 1 SOR 79 339 s 1 SOR 79 340 s 1 SOR 79 374 s 1 SOR 79 677 s 1 SOR 79 719 s 1 SOR 79 940 s 1 SOR 80 161 s 1 SOR 80 282 s 1 SOR 80 439 s 1 SOR 80 440 s 1 SOR 80 636 s 1 SOR 80 638 s 1 SOR 80 782 s 1 SOR 81 88 s 1 SOR 81 1033 s 1 SOR 82 569 s 1 SOR 82 656 s 1 SOR 82 753 s 1 SOR 82 754 s 1 SOR 83 176 s 1 SOR 83 859 s 1 SOR 84 374 s 1 SOR 84 812 s 1 SOR 86 161 s 1 SOR 86 683 s 1 SOR 86 976 s 1 SOR 86 977 s 1 SOR 87 154 s 1 SOR 87 497 s 1 SOR 87 578 s 1 SOR 87 660 s 1 SOR 88 268 s 1 SOR 89 384 s 1 SOR 90 588 s 1 SOR 90 805 s 1 SOR 91 425 s 1 SOR 91 692 s 1 SOR 92 173 s 1 SOR 92 250 s 1 SOR 92 545 s 1 SOR 93 5 s 1 SOR 93 31 s 1 SOR 93 146 s 1 SOR 93 561 s 1 SOR 94 291 s 1 SOR 94 669 s 1 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 94 717 s 1 SOR 95 147 s 1 SOR 95 164 s 1 SOR 95 536 s s 7 SOR 96 366 s 1 SOR 97 141 s 1 SOR 97 200 s 1 SOR 97 201 s 1 SOR 97 421 ss 1 17 22 F SOR 97 447 s 1 SOR 98 125 s 1 SOR 98
86. Figure 2 may be used to measure the angular width and angular length of an image of a cylinder where a the comparison chart is placed in a vertical plane that contains the image to be evaluated b the plane of the comparison chart is perpendicular to the line of sight c the image of the cylinder and the comparison chart are visible through the still or video camera s viewfinder d a photograph is taken at the driver s eye position and e the image of the cylinder is larger than the references shown on the comparison chart 24 Images reflected in each System B mirror shall be located no less than 3 minutes of arc from the edge of the reflective surface when measured at the driver s eye position Testing 25 A System A mirror and a System B mirror shall be tested as follows a cylinders A B C D and E shall be placed at the following locations as illustrated in Figure 1 with measurements taken from the centre of the cylinder as viewed from above i cylinder A shall be placed in front of the bus so that its centre passes through the bus s longitudinal centreline and its top is directly visible through the portion of the windshield wiped by the windshield wipers at the driver s eye position ii cylinder B shall be placed on the side opposite the driver s side at a point where the cylinder is entirely visible through the convex mirrors of both System A and System B on that side so that its centre falls in a vert
87. Hel S2INCHCS pe em INSIDE FLOOR 74 IMCMES 160 96 em ee FINCHES INSIDE WALL S7INCHES 15 08 cm 1932 08 cm 71 INCHES 1100 34 em 30 REAR EMERGENCY EXIT WITHOUT REAR OBSTRUCTION FIGURE 3 LOW AND HIGH FORCE ACCESS REGIONS FOR EMERGENCY EXITS WITHOUT ADJACENT SEATS http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 111 de 131 i LAETTE IDLEGN OPTIONAL VND SURFACE oF EE em WOT SL allen E MOUNTING UF VESTING OF vICE se ss On 112 emt Mi 300 Hen 47 62 gm PHIR AL RAD su o CENTRE OF AREA OS Graza SUGAR Pink BLOCK mit q oe qui o 380 07 100 6089 em SYNTHET C UNDIALAVER 200 TI oe 1723 08 173 20 0 et TENSILE STAENO FH r eet PR LOCATION NAPA COAT RAIN WET CHAVO OA An 1 902 tn O 878 OOO om SYNTHETIC EX 1000 2 0 pu ones 76 s Pe TENTA BYR EMG TE 10018 DELONGATIOM FIGURE 4 HEAD FORM SOR 80 159 s 1 SOR 86 978 s 1 SOR 87 176 s 1 SOR 92 122 s 1 SOR 94 374 s 5 SOR 94 692 s 2 SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 99 215 s 1 F WINDSHIELD ZONE INTRUSION 219 1 The following definitions apply in this section daylight opening or DLO means the maximum unobstructed opening through the glazing surface including reveal or garnish mouldings adjoining the surface as measured parallel to the outer surface of the glazing material ouverture de jour or OJ protect
88. NCIAL SHIPMENTS 5 1 1 Notwithstanding section 4 of the Act a manufacturer may ship from one province to another or deliver to any person for the purpose of so shipping a vehicle of a prescribed class manufactured in Canada that does not bear the national safety mark if a the manufacturer files with the Minister a declaration signed by that person or that person s duly authorized representative setting out the information referred to in subsection 2 b the vehicle is being shipped or delivered for the purpose of exhibition demonstration evaluation or testing and c the vehicle is destroyed or returned to the province of origin within one year 2 A declaration made pursuant to subsection 1 shall set out the following information a the name and address of the manufacturer of the vehicle b the month and year the vehicle was manufactured c the class make model and vehicle identification number of the vehicle d the use to be made of the vehicle e the estimated period of time the vehicle will be used on public roads f whether the vehicle will be destroyed or returned to the province of origin after completion of the purpose for which it was shipped or delivered and g the date the vehicle will be destroyed or returned to the province of origin 3 The declarations made in accordance with subsection 2 a shall be filed prior to shipping or delivering the vehicle or b in the case of a company whos
89. OCUMENT 6 1 1 An incomplete vehicle manufacturer shall at or before the time of delivery of an incomplete vehicle provide to the intermediate manufacturer the final stage manufacturer or other purchaser as the case may be an incomplete vehicle document that contains the following information a the name and mailing address of the incomplete vehicle manufacturer b the month and year the incomplete vehicle manufacturer performed its last manufacturing operation on the incomplete vehicle c the vehicle identification number d the GVWR expressed in kilograms intended for the vehicle when it is a completed vehicle e the GAWR expressed in kilograms intended for each axle of the vehicle when it is a completed vehicle listed in order from front to rear except that the GAWR for consecutive axles that have identical GAWRs when equipped with tires that have the same designated tire size may be stated once followed by the words each and chacun f a list of the types of vehicles referred to in paragraph 6 1 f into which the incomplete vehicle is designed to be manufactured and g the numbers of the prescribed standards that apply at the date specified in paragraph b in respect of each type of vehicle listed followed in each case by one or more of the following statements as applicable i a statement that the completed vehicle will conform to the standard if no alterations are made to the components of the
90. Print Pagina de 131 Department of Justice Minist re de la Justice os E Canada Canada Can ada Enabling Statute Motor Vehicle Safety Act Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations C R C c 1038 Regulation current to May 13th 2009 Attention See coming into force provision and notes where applicable Table Of Contents Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations C R C c 1038 MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY ACT Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations REGULATIONS RESPECTING SAFETY FOR MOTOR VEHICLES AND MOTOR VEHICLE COMPONENTS SHORT TITLE 1 These Regulations may be cited as the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations INTERPRETATION 2 1 In these Regulations AATCC means the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists AATCC accessory mass Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 Act means the Motor Vehicle Safety Act Loi adjacent seat means a designated seating position so located that a portion of its occupant space is not more than 25 4 cm from an emergency exit for a distance of at least 38 1 cm measured horizontally and parallel to the emergency exit si ge adjacent adjustment hardware means hardware designed for adjusting the size of a seat belt assembly to fit the user including such hardware as may be integral with a buckle a retractor or attachment hardware pi ces de r glage agricultural commodity trailer Repealed SOR 99 357 s 1 aiming reference plane Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 air bag means an inflatable
91. ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 32 de 131 b to an automatic vehicle speed control located on the steering wheel or on the steering wheel hub or spokes when the vehicle aligned to the manufacturer s specifications has the steering wheel positioned for the vehicle to travel in a direction other than straight forward 7 The identification in respect of each of the controls for the systems referred to in paragraphs 3 a c and e and 5 a to c and f to other than an identification symbol in respect of a foot control of a hand control that is mounted on the steering column on the floor on the floor console or in the windshield header area or of a control for an air conditioning and heating system that does not direct air directly onto the windshield shall a be illuminated whenever the headlamps are activated and b when illuminated emit light at one of at least two levels of intensity one of which is so low as to be barely discernible to a driver whose eyes have adapted to dark ambient road conditions 8 When the headlamps are being flashed or operated as daytime running lamps at a reduced light intensity it is not necessary to illuminate the controls for the systems referred to in subsection 7 9 Subject to subsections 10 to 12 the following displays where fitted on a vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 pounds or less shall be accompanied by an identification simila
92. Standard Practice for Operating ASTM G 152 00a Standard Practice for Light Exposure Apparatus Carbon Arc Type With Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials Materials 8 For the purposes of section S4 1 e of TSD 209 the first sentence of the section shall be read without reference to the words readily accessible to the occupant to permit his easy and rapid removal from the assembly 9 Sections S4 1 g and m S4 5 b and S4 6 of TSD 209 do not apply 10 The instructions referred to in section S4 1 1 of TSD 209 shall be provided in the English and French versions of the owner s manual 11 The requirements relating to non locking retractors provided in sections S4 1 l S4 3 h and S5 2 h and k of TSD 209 do not apply 12 A Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly that includes a load limiter and that does not meet the elongation requirements of sections S4 2 c S4 4 a 2 or S4 4 b 4 or 5 of TSD 209 may be installed only at a front outboard seating position that is equipped with a frontal air bag 13 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 78 910 s 2 SOR 87 154 s 3 SOR 92 545 s 4 SOR 97 447 s 6 SOR 2007 180 s 13 SEAT BELT ANCHORAGES STANDARD 210 General 210 1 The following seat belt anchorages shall be installed in a designated seating position in respect of which a seat belt assembly has been
93. TSD 108 do not apply to a motorcycle that is fitted with a single beam headlamp 17 Subject to subsection 18 the headlamp tail lamp and licence plate lamp of a motorcycle shall be continuously illuminated when the engine is operating 18 The headlamp tail lamp and licence plate lamp of a motorcycle may remain off after the engine is started until the motorcycle is set in motion by its own power for the first time 19 In addition to the requirements of section S5 5 7 of TSD 108 the lamps referred to in section S5 5 7 a of TSD 108 shall be activated when a the front fog lamps on the vehicle are activated in a steady burning state other than as daytime running lamps or b the rear fog lamps on the vehicle are activated in a steady burning state 20 The requirements of section S5 5 11 of TSD 108 are replaced by the daytime running lamp requirements of subsections 44 to 65 Conspicuity Systems Section S5 7 of TSD 108 21 Despite section S5 7 of TSD 108 the colour of retroreflective sheeting applied to a vehicle pursuant to sections S5 7 1 4 1 a and S5 7 1 4 2 of TSD 108 may be white yellow white and yellow or white and red in accordance with section S5 7 1 2 of TSD 108 or section 3 1 3 3 1 2 or 3 1 1 of SAE Standard J578 Color Specification May 1988 22 Where the retroreflective sheeting referred to in section S5 7 1 2 of TSD 108 is applied to a non vertical surface the entrance angle used to demonstrate complianc
94. UES 1 J 1 T 3 B 2 K 2 U 4 C 3 L 3 V 5 D M 4 W 6 E 5 N 5 X 7 F 6 P 7 Y 8 G 7 R 9 Z 9 H 8 S 2 TABLE V CHARACTER AND WEIGHT FACTOR http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Ath ow Sth ww 6th sess Tth ow 8th ww Oth vei 10th 11th ow 12th ow 13th 14th 15th ow 16th oo 17th ow Pagina 59 de 131 NOU O1 O_ J N WA O1 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 82 753 s 3 SOR 87 660 s 5 SOR 88 268 s 7 SOR 88 535 s 1 SOR 92 545 s 3 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 97 532 s 3 SOR 2000 182 s 7 SOR 2000 241 s 1 SOR 2000 304 s 5 SOR 2002 55 s 14 SOR 2003 272 s 15 SOR 2004 250 s 3 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 72 s 3 E SOR 2009 33 s 2 MOTOR VEHICLE BRAKE FLUIDS STANDARD 116 SOR 93 561 S 5 SOR 97 421 S 7 F 116 1 The hydraulic brake system of a vehicle shall contain brake fluid that conforms to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 116 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluids TSD 116 as amended from time to time 2 A reference in TSD 116 to a standard published by ASTM that is set out in column 1 of the table to this subsection may be read as a reference to the standard set out opposite that standard in column 2 of the table Item TABLE Column 1 ASTM D 445 65 Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids Kinematic and Dynamic Viscosities ASTM D 1121 67 Standard Method of Test for Reserve Alkalinity of
95. VWR of 4 536 kg or Less or on the tire information label referred to in section S5 3 b of Technical Standards Document No 120 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of More Than 4 536 kg and g in the case of a vehicle manufactured in Canada for sale in Canada a drawing of at least 20 mm in diameter depicting the national safety mark set out in Schedule and showing in its centre in figures of at least 2 mm in height the authorization number assigned by the Minister to the company under section 3 2 Subject to subsection 3 the information label shall be applied a to the hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position b to the left side of the instrument panel or the inward facing surface of the door next to the driver s seating position if it is impracticable to apply the label in accordance with paragraph a or c to a conspicuous and readily accessible location if it is impracticable to apply the label in accordance with paragraph a or b or if the vehicle does not have the components described in paragraph a or b 3 In the case of a stripped or cowl chassis the information label may be applied to a conspicuous and readily accessible location on the steering column 4 The drawing referred to in paragraph 1 g may be displayed on a label applied to the vehicle beside the incomplete vehicle manufacturer s information la
96. a en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 48 de 131 Figure 3 Vehicle Placard Bilingual Example 13 mmx 14 mm Optional 0 51 x 0 55 Alphanumeric Yellow Text on Black Background or Identifier Black Text on Yellow Background or Barcode COLD TIRE PRESSURE P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi P195 70R 14 200 kPa 29 psi SEE ABOVE _3G7DA03E41S503870 Yellow Text on Black Background or Black Text on Yellow Background Figure 4 Tire Inflation Pressure Label Unilingual English Example 13 mm x 14 mm Identificateur 0 51 pox 0 55 po alphanum rique Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou ou code barres texte en noir sur fond jaune optionnel P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 Ib po P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 Ib po DE SECOURS VOIRCIDESSUS T Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou texte en noir sur fond jaune Figure 5 Tire Inflation Pressure Label Unilingual French Example http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 49 de 131 Optional Alphanumeric Identifier 13 mmx 14 mm or Barc ode 0 51 x 0 55 Yellow Text on Black Background or Identificateur 0 51 po x 0 55 po Black Text on Yellow Background alphanum rique Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou ou code barres texte en noir sur fond jaune optionnel F sean TIRE SIZE PRESSION DES PNEU DIMENSIONS PNEUS FROID FRONT P495 70R14 200 kPa 29
97. able side doors of a vehicle that is designed to be used without side doors b the side doors of a walk in van or c the side doors of a vehicle where with an H point template described in section 4 1 of SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 positioned in any seat the seat adjusted to any position and the seat back placed in accordance with subsection 6 i no point on a 254 mm horizontal longitudinal line passing through and bisected by the H point falls within the transverse horizontal projection of the door s opening or ii no point on a longitudinal vertical plane tangent to the outboard side of the seat cushion is less than 254 mm from the innermost point on the inside surface of the door which point is situated vertically between the H point and shoulder reference point of the template and longitudinally between the front edge of the cushion with the seat adjusted to its forwardmost position and the rear edge of the cushion with the seat adjusted to its rearmost position as illustrated in the figure 5 Where a vehicle has seat anchoring hardware the conditions set out in paragraph 4 c shall be met with any seat recommended by the manufacturer installed in any position for which there is seat anchoring hardware 6 For the purposes of paragraph 4 c the seat back shall be placed in the manufacturer s nominal design riding position in the manner specified
98. acters that uniquely identify a vehicle including where applicable the twelfth to fourteenth characters inclusive that constitute part of the identifier for each make and class of vehicle manufactured and in all cases the information necessary to decipher the characters in vehicle identification numbers 10 If a character in a vehicle identification number identifies engine net power the engine net power represented by that character shall not differ by more than 10 per cent from the actual engine net power 11 Manufacturers of vehicles in respect of which this section applies shall apply to the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for the characters referred to in paragraphs 3 a and a 7 that uniquely identify the manufacturer and class of vehicle 12 Despite subsections 1 to 11 every vehicle having a model year of 2009 or earlier shall comply with the requirements of this section as it read on the day before the day on which this subsection came into force TABLE Column Column Il Item Class of Vehicle Decipherable Information 1 Passenger car or three wheeled vehicle Make line series body type engine type and all restraint system types and their location in the vehicle 2 Multi purpose passenger vehicle Make line series body type engine type and gross vehicle weight rating In addition for multipurpose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less all restraint system types and their location in
99. ages and meeting the requirements of subsection 21 shall be placed within the occupant space 21 The marking on every label referred to in subsections 19 and 20 shall be legible to an occupant with corrected visual acuity corresponding to a Snellen ratio of 20 40 who is a person described in a paragraph 22 a b or c when the locations described in the other two of those paragraphs are occupied and b paragraph 22 d or e when the only source of light is the normal night time illumination of the bus interior and the occupant is a person described in subsection 22 22 For the purposes of subsection 21 the following persons are described a a person seated in the adjacent seat b a person seated in the seat directly adjoining the adjacent seat c a person standing in the aisle location that is closest to the adjacent seat d a person standing in the aisle location nearest to the emergency exit when the exit has no adjacent seat or e a person lying with his back against the floor opposite the roof emergency exit if the vehicle is so equipped 23 Each school bus emergency exit provided in accordance with subsection 9 shall a be identified as Emergency Door and Porte de secours or Emergency Exit and Issue de secours or Sortie de secours whichever is applicable in letters at least 50 mm 2 in high of a colour that contrasts with its background located at the top of or direc
100. aint against rearward movement of the head of the anthropomorphic test device by means of a continuous seat back that is an integral part of the system and that has a a height measured along the system seat back surface in the vertical longitudinal plane passing through the longitudinal centre line of the child restraint system from the lowest point on the system seating surface that is contactable by the buttocks of the seated anthropomorphic test device of at least 500 mm 20 inches and b a width of not less than 200 mm 8 inches measured in the horizontal plane at the height of 500 mm 20 inches http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 99 de 131 specified in paragraph a 3 Every built in rear facing child restraint system when tested in accordance with subsection 1 shall a not allow the angle between the system s back support surface and the vertical to exceed 70 at any time during impact simulation and b retain all portions of the anthropometric test device within the system so that no portion of the target point on either side of the device s head passes through the transverse orthogonal planes whose intersection contains the forward most and top most points on the built in child restraint system surfaces 4 Every built in booster cushion when tested in accordance with subsection 1 shall a subject to subsection 6 provide restraint against rearward m
101. alf times the horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis shown in Figure 2 2 Subsection 1 does not apply to a motor tricycle designed in such a way that it leans during a turning manoeuvre in the same direction as the turn 3 The total weight of a motor tricycle or three wheeled vehicle on all its front wheels as measured at the tire ground interfaces shall be not less than 25 per cent and not greater than 70 per cent of the loaded weight of that vehicle 4 The loaded weight of a motor tricycle or three wheeled vehicle and the location of its centre of mass shall be determined under the following conditions a the fuel tank is filled to any level from 90 to 95 per cent of the vehicle fuel tank capacity b a 50th percentile adult male anthropomorphic test device or an equivalent mass is located at every front outboard designated seating position but if an equivalent mass is used its centre of mass shall coincide within 12 mm in the vertical dimension and 12 mm in the horizontal dimension with a point 6 mm below the position of the H point as determined by using the equipment and procedures specified in SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 except that the length of the lower leg and thigh segments of the H point machine shall be adjusted to 414 mm and 401 mm respectively instead of the 50th percentile values specified in Table 1 of that sta
102. all ensure that the new ratings are displayed on that intermediate manufacturer s information label and a are increased in accordance with the written recommendations of the incomplete vehicle manufacturer or if applicable of another previous manufacturer or b are within the load carrying capacity of the vehicle s components when the vehicle is loaded for its intended use as a completed vehicle SOR 2002 55 s 5 FINAL STAGE MANUFACTURER S DOCUMENT 6 5 1 A final stage manufacturer shall make an addendum to the incomplete vehicle document that contains the following information a its name and mailing address and b a clear and precise description of all the changes that it has made to the incomplete vehicle 2 The final stage manufacturer shall retain and make available to the Minister on request the incomplete vehicle documentation referred to in subsection 1 and sections 6 1 and 6 3 for a period of no less than five years after the date manufacturing operations on the vehicle are completed by the final stage manufacturer SOR 2002 55 s 5 FINAL STAGE MANUFACTURER S COMPLIANCE LABEL 6 6 1 Every final stage manufacturer shall choose a date of manufacture for a completed vehicle that may be no earlier than the date specified by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer on its information label but no later than the date manufacturing operations on the vehicle are completed by the final stage manufacturer and sha
103. an 9 C and not more than 43 C 5 to 8 Repealed SOR 2009 121 s 3 SOR 80 282 s 3 SOR 82 274 s 1 SOR 90 387 s 2 F SOR 93 5 s 6 SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 95 536 s 7 F SOR 97 201 s 5 SOR 97 421 ss 17 22 F SOR 2003 57 s 2 SOR 2008 72 s 10 F SOR 2009 121 s 3 213 to 213 3 Repealed SOR 98 160 s 3 BUILT IN CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS AND BUILT IN BOOSTER CUSHIONS 213 4 1 Every built in child restraint system and built in booster cushion when tested in accordance with Test Method 213 4 Built In Child Restraint Systems and Built In Booster Cushions January 2007 in any of the positions that the system cushion or vehicle seat can be used while the vehicle is in motion shall a exhibit no complete separation of any load bearing structural element and no partial separation exposing either surfaces that have a radius of less than 6 4 mm 1 4 inch or surfaces that have protrusions greater than 9 5 mm 3 8 inch above the immediate adjacent surrounding contactable surface of any structural element of the system b remain in the same adjustment position during the testing as it was immediately before the testing began where the system is adjustable to different positions and c be constructed only of materials that conform to the requirements of section 302 2 Every built in child restraint system when tested in accordance with subsection 1 shall subject to subsection 6 provide restr
104. and S7 9 of TSD 108 every headlamp assembly on a motorcycle shall conform to sections S7 8 2 S7 8 2 2 S7 8 3 S7 8 4 and S7 8 5 1 c of TSD 108 13 Every school bus shall be equipped with a flasher that conforms to SAE Recommended Practice J1054 Warning Lamp Alternating Flashers October 1989 and that activates the signal lamps referred to in section S5 1 4 of TSD 108 Location of Required Equipment Section S5 3 of TSD 108 14 For the purposes of section S5 3 and Table Il of TSD 108 the location of rear identification lamps on a van trailer with side opening rear doors conforms to that section if the lamps are located as close as practicable to the top of the vehicle a above or on the rear doors where the vertical face of the header rail measured on the vertical centreline of the vehicle extends at least 25 mm above the rear doors or b above or below or on the rear doors where the vertical face of the header rail measured on the vertical centreline of the vehicle extends less than 25 mm above the rear doors 14 1 Despite section S5 3 1 and Table IV of TSD 108 the tail lamps stop lamps and parking lamps on a motor tricycle shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of section S5 3 1 and Table IV of TSD 108 for tail lamps stop lamps and parking lamps installed on a passenger car 15 Repealed SOR 2008 104 s 12 Special Wiring Requirements Section S5 5 of TSD 108 16 Sections 5 5 1 and S5 5 2 of
105. ans the name that a manufacturer applies to a family of vehicles of the same class make line series and body type mod le model year means the year used to designate a discrete vehicle model irrespective of the calendar year in which the vehicle was actually produced so long as the period of such production is less than two years ann e de mod le moped Repealed SOR 88 268 s 1 motorcycle means a vehicle that is of the subclasses enclosed motorcycle open motorcycle limited speed motorcycle or motor tricycle and a is designed to travel on not more than three wheels in contact with the ground b has a minimum wheel rim diameter of 250 mm and c has a minimum wheelbase of 1 016 mm but does not include a power assisted bicycle a restricted use motorcycle a passenger car a truck a multi purpose passenger vehicle a competition vehicle a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes or a three wheeled vehicle motocyclette motor driven cycle Repealed SOR 88 268 s 1 motor home means a multi purpose passenger vehicle that is designed to provide temporary residential accommodations as evidenced by the presence of at least four of the following a cooking facilities b a refrigerator or ice box c a self contained toilet d a heating or air conditioning system that can function independently of the vehicle engine e a potable water supply system that includes a faucet and sink and f
106. applicable to that system 4 Despite the testing requirements set out in subsection 3 for the windshield defrosting and defogging system of a passenger car or three wheeled vehicle a in the case of a passenger car or three wheeled vehicle equipped with a heating system other than a heat exchanger type that uses the engine s coolant as a means to supply the heat to the heat exchanger the procedure specified by the vehicle s manufacturer for cold weather starting shall be followed during the entire test period except that the use of a power or heat source external to the vehicle is not permitted b in the case of all other passenger cars and three wheeled vehicles i during the entire test period the engine speed shall not exceed 1 500 revolutions per minute in neutral gear or the engine speed and load shall not exceed the speed and load at 40 km h 25 miles per hour in the manufacturer s recommended gear with road load or ii during the first 5 minutes of the test period the warm up procedure recommended by the vehicle s manufacturer for cold weather starting shall be followed and during the last 35 minutes of the test period the procedure referred to in subparagraph i shall be followed c a room air change of 90 times per hour is not required d the windshield wipers may be used during the test if they are operated without manual assistance e one or two windows may be open a total of 25 mm f the defroster blo
107. apply 2 For the purposes of this section a the word should in sections 3 2 3 3 and 4 3 and in the footnote on page 5 of SAE Recommended Practice J288 shall be interpreted as expressing an obligation b the words snowmobile fuel in sections 3 2 4 3 and 4 5 of SAE Recommended Practice J288 shall be read as unleaded gasoline and c the word snowmobile in sections 4 3 and 4 5 of SAE Recommended Practice J288 shall be read as vehicle 3 Subject to subsection 5 a motorcycle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses a fuel with a boiling point of 0 C or higher as a source of energy for its propulsion shall meet the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J1241 Fuel and Lubricant Tanks for Motorcycles revised version of November 1999 except that section 1 of that Practice does not apply 4 For the purposes of this section a the words rated fuel capacity in SAE Recommended Practice J1241 shall have the same meaning as vehicle fuel tank capacity as defined in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations and b the words significant effect in sections 5 2 3 and 5 3 3 of SAE Recommended Practice J1241 shall be read as any effect resulting in the cracking or leaking of the tank 5 Instead of complying with subsection 3 a motorcycle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses a fuel with a boiling point of 0 C or higher as a source of energy for its propulsion may mee
108. ard 1996 shall be clamped in the frame of the holding fixture 12 Any plastic glazing material that meets the requirements of item 7 of section 4 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 may be used in that portion of a motorcycle windshield that is below an imaginary horizontal plane located 380 mm vertically above the lowest seating position 13 Each piece of glazing material installed in a vehicle shall be legibly and permanently marked with a the appropriate marking required by section 7 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 and b an approved code mark assigned by the Minister to the glazing material manufacturer in letters and numbers not less than 1 8 mm in height SOR 82 656 s 4 SOR 84 336 s 1 SOR 86 161 s 2 SOR 88 268 s 11 SOR 93 5 s 3 F SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 94 717 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 16 SOR 2002 187 s 2 SOR 2003 272 s 22 SOR 2004 250 s 4 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E DOOR LOCKS AND DOOR RETENTION COMPONENTS STANDARD 206 206 1 Subject to subsection 2 every enclosed motorcycle multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle passenger car and truck that is equipped with side doors or back doors shall be so equipped in accordance with either a the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 206 Door Locks and Door Retention Components TSD 206 as amended from time to time or b the general requirements performance requirements and test procedures set out in ECE Regul
109. ast a single location in view of the driver when the ignition switch is set to the position where the engine is capable of operation http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C C 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 36 de 131 5 The identification of transmission control positions need not be displayed when the ignition switch is set to the position used to start the vehicle 6 The identification of the transmission control positions and sequence on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission shall be permanently displayed in view of the driver 7 lf a passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle truck or three wheeled vehicle has a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less and is equipped with a manual transmission a motor used for the vehicle s propulsion must not be started by setting the ignition switch to the position used to start the motor unless the clutch pedal is depressed or the drive train is otherwise disengaged 8 In this section drive train means the components that transfer motive power from the motor to the drive wheels SOR 95 164 s 4 SOR 97 421 ss 4 22 F SOR 2003 189 s 1 SOR 2003 272 s 34 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 246 s 2 WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING 103 1 In this section critical area means area C as referred to in section 104 of this Schedule zone critique defog means to remove moisture from the inside surface of the glass d sembuer defrost means to melt frost
110. at belt assembly parts shall be maintained in an accessible position under normal conditions 38 Subsection 37 does not apply where a the seat cushions are movable and movement of both the seat cushions and the seat back enables the seat back to be used for a function other than seating b the seats are removable or c the seats are movable and enable the space normally occupied by the seat to be used for a function other than seating 39 The buckle and latch plate referred to in subsection 37 shall not pass through any seat belt webbing guides or conduits that are provided and shall not fall behind the seat where the seat belt is completely retracted or if the belt is non retractable where the belt buckle is unlatched and in either case a the seat is moved to any position to which it is designed to be adjusted and b if the seat back is foldable the seat back is starting from the manufacturer s nominal design riding position folded forward as far as possible and then moved backward into the initial position 40 The inboard receptacle end of a seat belt assembly installed at a front outboard designated seating position shall be accessible without having to move the centre armrest where that armrest is in any position Transitional Provisions 41 Trucks buses and multi purpose passenger vehicles that have a GVWR of 3 856 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2 495 kg or less and that are manufactured befo
111. at the option of the manufacturer mean the number of sleeping positions provided in the motor home nombre d sign de places assises designated seating position means any plan view position capable of accommodating a person at least as large as a 5th percentile adult female where the overall seat configuration and design and the vehicle design are such that the position is likely to be used as a Seating position while the vehicle is in motion but does not include any plan view position of temporary or folding jump seats or other auxiliary seating accommodation place assise d sign e disc wheel means a supporting member for a tire or tire and tube assembly comprising a rim with a dish shaped component that is permanently attached to the inner circumference of the rim roue a disque display means an indicator a tell tale or an alphanumeric readout or a collection of indicators tell tales and alphanumeric readouts on the instrument panel of a vehicle affichage distributor Repealed SOR 95 147 s 1 driver means the occupant of a vehicle seated immediately behind the steering control system conducteur driver operated accelerator control system means all components of a vehicle except the fuel metering device that regulate engine speed in direct response to movement of the driver operated control and that return the throttle to the idle position upon release of the driver operated control syst me de commande d acc
112. ation No 11 entitled Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Vehicles with regard to Door Latches and Door Retention Components in the version dated June 11 2007 as amended from time to time after that date by any amendment in the 03 series of anendments 2 Subject to subsection 5 until August 31 2011 every enclosed motorcycle multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle passenger car and truck that is equipped with side doors or back doors may be so equipped in accordance with the requirements of TSD 206 as it read on August 23 1996 instead of in accordance with subsection 1 3 Beginning on September 1 2011 every bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less that is equipped with side doors or back doors shall be so equipped in accordance with subsection 1 4 For the purposes of paragraph 6 3 2 of ECE Regulation No 11 the locking device shall be the device referred to in paragraph 6 3 2 1 a or b of that Regulation 5 Despite sections S5 1 1 2 and S5 4 1 2 of TSD 206 as it read on August 23 1996 compliance with sections S4 1 1 3 and S4 4 1 4 of that document shall be demonstrated in accordance with paragraph S5 1 1 4 a or b of the document referred to in paragraph 1 a http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 67 de 131 6 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 97 14 s 2 SOR 2001 116 s 3 SOR 2002 55 s 21 SOR 2003 272 s 23 SOR 2005
113. automatic occupant protection system that may be deployed when a collision occurs sac gonflable air brake system means a brake system that uses air as a medium for transmitting pressure or force from the driver control to the service brake including an air over hydraulic brake subsystem but does not include a system that uses compressed air or vacuum only to assist the driver in applying muscular force to hydraulic or mechanical components syst me de freinage a air comprim all terrain vehicle means a wheeled or tracked vehicle other than a snowmobile or work vehicle designed primarily for recreational use or for the transportation of property or equipment exclusively on undeveloped road rights of way marshland open country or other unprepared surfaces v hicule tout terrain ambient temperature means the surrounding air temperature measured at such a distance from a vehicle under test that the temperature is not significantly affected by heat from the vehicle temp rature ambiante American specifications vehicle Repealed SOR 95 147 s 1 ANSI means the American National Standards Institute ANS ANS Z26 Repealed SOR 94 717 s 1 ANSI Z26 Safety Code 1990 means the American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Equipment Operating on Land Highways Safety Code Standard ANSI SAE 226 1 1990 published November 1990 and reprinted February 1992 co
114. automatic transmission control position shall a be illuminated whenever the headlamps are activated and b when illuminated emit light at one of at least two levels of intensity one of which is so low as to be barely discernible to a driver whose eyes have adapted to dark ambient road conditions 11 When the headlamps are being flashed or operated as daytime running lamps it is not necessary for the indicators referred to in section 10 to be illuminated 12 Where tell tales are fitted with the corresponding indicators referred to in any of paragraphs 9 e to h the identification required by subsection 9 may be omitted from the tell tale 13 A tell tale while activated a shall where a colour is specified for that tell tale in Table Il to this section be of that colour b shall be of a colour that contrasts with its background c in the case of a tell tale that identifies the headlamp upper beam the turn signal the hazard warning signal the http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 33 de 131 seat belt or a brake system malfunction shall not be adjustable to a level that makes it invisible under any lighting condition and d shall be identifiable by the driver under all lighting conditions 14 Except as provided in subsection 20 no tell tale shall emit light except a while identifying a malfunction or vehicle condition that it is designed to identi
115. bel SOR 2002 55 s 5 SOR 2005 342 s 2 SOR 2008 258 s 4 INTERMEDIATE MANUFACTURER S DOCUMENT 6 3 1 Every intermediate manufacturer of an incomplete vehicle shall at or before the time of delivery of the incomplete vehicle to the subsequent manufacturer provide to the subsequent manufacturer in the manner specified in subsection 6 1 2 the incomplete vehicle document that was provided by the previous manufacturer 2 An intermediate manufacturer shall before complying with subsection 1 make an addendum to the incomplete vehicle document that contains the following information a its name and mailing address b a clear and precise description of all the changes it has made to the incomplete vehicle and c if any of the changes affect the validity of a statement made by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer in accordance with paragraph 6 1 1 g an indication of the amendments that must be made to those statements to reflect the changes made by the intermediate manufacturer SOR 2002 55 s 5 INTERMEDIATE MANUFACTURER S INFORMATION LABEL 6 4 1 Subject to subsection 3 an intermediate manufacturer shall apply to every incomplete vehicle beside the information label of the previous manufacturer an information label that displays the following information a a statement in both official languages that the vehicle is an incomplete vehicle b the name of the intermediate manufacturer http laws just
116. bus in the rear half of the bus passenger compartment and ii one push out rear window that A provides a minimum opening clearance 400 mm 16 in high and 1 200 mm 48 in wide B is capable of being released by the operation of not more than two mechanisms that are located in the high force access region as shown in Figure 3C and that do not have to be operated simultaneously and C for release and opening requires a force of not more than 180 N 40 Ib applied in the directions specified in subsections 13 and 14 10 Every school bus shall be provided with a warning system that shall a be activated when the vehicle ignition is in the ON position and i any emergency exit of the bus is locked in such a manner that the release mechanism of the exit cannot be activated by a person at that exit without the use of a special device such as a key or special information such as a lock combination ii a release mechanism that opens an emergency exit is not in the fully latched position or iii one or more emergency exits are not in the fully closed position and b generate a continuous warning sound audible at the driver s seating position and in the immediate vicinity of the emergency door or push out window that caused the system to be activated 11 Every push out window or other emergency exit not required by subsection 9 shall have one or two release mechanisms located within the access regions shown in Figure 1
117. by the manufacturer or if the manner is not specified by the manufacturer at the first detent rearward of 25 from the vertical with every adjustable head restraint placed in its highest adjustment position and the adjustable lumbar support placed so that it is set in its released full back position http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 102 de 131 Shoulder Reference Point Seat Back H Point Rear Edge of Seat Cushion in Rearmost Position hs A Front Edge of Seat Cushion in Forwardmost Position SIDE VIEW oy gi Seat Back Seat Cushion J Longitudinal Vertical Plane Tangent to the Outboard Side of the Seal Cushion Min 254 mm Clearance TOP VIEW FIGURE DOOR CLEARANCE SOR 82 275 s 1 SOR 97 201 s 3 SOR 2003 272 s 28 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 17 BUMPERS 215 1 A passenger car shall be equipped with bumpers that conform to either a the requirements set out in paragraph 6 and the low speed impact test procedure set out in Annex 3 except for paragraph 4 of that Annex of ECE Regulation No 42 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Vehicles with Regard to Their Front and Rear Protective Devices Bumpers etc in the version dated June 12 2007 as amended after that date by any amendment in the 00 series of amendments or b the requirements conditions and test procedures set out in title 4
118. capacity of i the suspension springs http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 125 de 131 ii the axle iii the hubs iv the disc wheels or v the tires 3 The rated load carrying capacity referred to in paragraphs 2 a and b for suspension springs axles hubs disc wheels spoke wheels demountable rims or tires shall a be measured at the tire ground interface and b except in the case of heavy hauler trailers be the continuous service ratings supplied by the respective manufacturers of the suspension springs axles hubs disc wheels spoke wheels demountable rims or tires SOR 79 940 s 10 SOR 97 421 s 14 E AMERICAN SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE STANDARDS SOR 91 425 S 3 SOR 92 173 S 5 902 Repealed SOR 95 147 s 11 C DOLLY SPECIFICATIONS 903 1 Every C dolly shall be equipped with a an automotive type or a turntable type self steering mechanism b a means to return the wheels to within one degree of the straight ahead position whenever any steering force applied to the wheels is removed c a device that automatically locks the steering mechanism in the straight ahead position in the event of a failure of the means referred to in paragraph b and d a device i that includes a switch by means of which the driver can while seated in the normal driving position in the cab of the truck towing the C dolly lock the steering mechanism
119. ch is optional in the case of a limited speed motorcycle 4 Item 12 of Table 3 to TSD 123 applies to manual fuel tank shutoff valves only 5 Any control or display that is not listed in Table 3 to TSD 123 and for which no other identification requirements are specified in these Regulations shall if identified be identified by the corresponding symbol set out in International Standard ISO 6727 Road vehicles Motorcycles Symbols for controls indicators and telltales as amended from time to time 6 Any control or display for which a symbol is not specified in Table 3 to TSD 123 or in International Standard ISO 6727 Road vehicles Motorcycles Symbols for controls indicators and telltales as amended from time to time may be identified by a symbol designed by the manufacturer in compliance with the principles specified in that Standard 7 Wherever the term motorcycle is used in International Standard ISO 6727 Road vehicles Motorcycles Symbols for controls indicators and telltales as amended from time to time it shall have the same meaning as motorcycle in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations 8 The words and abbreviations that must be displayed under this section shall be displayed in both official languages However if there is insufficient space to display the words or abbreviations identifying the ignition tachometer or fuel tank shutoff valve in both official languages in a readily visible manner
120. cles buses and trucks may be equipped with headlamps that emit white light and that a comply with i ECE Regulation No 8 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Headlamps Emitting an Asymmetrical Passing Beam or a Driving Beam or Both and Equipped with Halogen Filament Lamps H Ho H3 HB3 HB4 H Hg Ho HIR1 HIR2 and or H as amended from time to time ii ECE Regulation No 20 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Headlamps Emitting an Asymmetrical Passing Beam or a Driving Beam or Both and Equipped with Halogen Filament Lamps H Lamps as amended from time to time iii ECE Regulation No 31 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Halogen Sealed beam Unit HSB Unit Motor Vehicle Headlamps Emitting an Asymmetrical Passing Beam or a Driving Beam or Both as amended from time to time iv ECE Regulation No 98 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Headlamps Equipped with Gas discharge Light Sources as amended from time to time or v ECE Regulation No 112 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Headlamps Emitting an Asymmetrical Passing Beam or a Driving Beam or Both and Equipped with Filament Lamps as amended from time to time b despite the requirements of the ECE Regulations referred to in this section are set to be used on vehicles designed to travel on the right hand side of the road c provide two upper beams and
121. combined with a lamp other than a front fog lamp that is not required by this section shall be designed to conform to SAE Recommended Practice J2087 Daytime Running Lamps for Use on Motor Vehicles August 1991 including the photometric values set out in Table 2 of this Recommended Practice except that a the maximum luminous intensity at any test point shall be 3 000 cd b the lamp is not required to conform to section 6 2 of that Recommended Practice and c the effective projected luminous lens area of the lamp may be less than 40 cm 47 1 A daytime running lamp that is not optically combined with another lamp may conform to SAE Standard J583 Front Fog Lamps June 1993 or to sections 3 4 2 4 3 5 and 6 of ECE Regulation No 19 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Front Fog Lamps Revision 3 March 2 1993 47 2 A daytime running lamp that is optically combined with a front turn signal lamp or a parking lamp shall conform to subsection 47 48 A daytime running lamp that is optically combined with a headlamp shall a where combined with the lower beam of a headlamp that is designed to conform to the photometric requirements of this section operate at normal operating voltage or i in the case of a DC system not less than 75 per cent and not more than 92 per cent of the normal operating voltage and ii in the case of an AC system or a modulated voltage system the equivalent root mean squar
122. continuously for more than 3 ms when the area of a seatback that is within the head impact area is impacted at a relative velocity of 24 km h 15 miles per hour in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice Motor Vehicle Seatback Assembly Laboratory Impact Test Procedure Head Area SAE J346 June 1971 using the instrumentation whose performance is specified in SAE Recommended Practice Instrumentation For Impact Tests SAE J211 October 1988 except that a the origin of the line tangent to the uppermost component of the seatback frame shall be a point on a transverse horizontal line through the seating reference point of the appropriate rear outboard designated seating position with adjustable forward seats in their rearmost design driving position and reclinable forward seatbacks in their normal design position b the impact shall be directed in a vertical plane parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle or in a plane normal to the surface at the point of contact c in the case of i a seat without head restraints each test shall be performed A in respect of each individual split seatback or bucket seat seatback between two points each situated 100 mm 4 inches outboard of its centreline and B in respect of each bench seat seatback between two points each situated 100 mm 4 inches outboard of the centreline of each outboard designated seating position and ii a seat with head restraints each t
123. corresponding identification symbol in Table to this section that is recognizable by the driver in daylight that is located on or adjacent to the relevant hand operated control and that appears to be upright when the control is in the off position shall be provided for a the clearance lamps identification lamps and side marker lamps switch if separate from the master lighting switch b the hazard warning system c the headlamp upper and lower beams except where operated by a control located on the left side of the steering column adjacent to the steering wheel d the horn except where activated by a lanyard e the master lighting switch f the rear window defog and defrost system g the turn signal except where its control is located on the left side of the steering column adjacent to the steering wheel in a plane essentially parallel to the steering wheel face plane h the fan for the heating and ventilation systems the windshield defog and defrost system the windshield washing system if manually operated k the windshield wiping and washing system if combined and the windshield wiping system 6 Notwithstanding subsections 3 and 5 the requirement that the identification appear to be upright does not apply a to a horn control that is located on a steering wheel or to a control that adjusts by means of a rotary motion and does not have an off position or http laws justice gc ca en
124. ct the impacted material shall be not less than 4 52 Nm 40 inch pounds before the force level on the head form test device exceeds 667 N 150 pounds and b at 1 5 m s five feet per second the contact area on the head form test device surface shall not be less than 1 935 mm three square inches 12 When any point on the rear surface of a part of a seat back or restraining barrier within the leg protection zone is impacted from any direction by a knee form test device as specified in the test methods referred to in subsection 2 at 4 88 m s 16 feet per second a the resisting force of the impacted material shall not exceed 2 669 N 600 pounds and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 116 de 131 b the contact area on the knee form test device surface shall not be less than 1 935 mm three square inches 13 Every school bus passenger seat shall be fastened to the floor of the bus by bolts that have nuts and locking devices such as lock washers Newtons Pounds 3000 12000 157 moin 18676 N in h hog iv 10000 2000 SEAT BACK FORCE DEFLECTION CURVE SHALL NOT ENTER SHADED AREA 8000 8000 1000 0 0mm 4448N 4000 0 0 inch 10001bs 2000 o 2 4 6 8 1 2 La Inches 40 so 120 o 200 240 280 320 30 mm DEFLECTION FIGURE 1 FORCE DEFLECTION ZONE SOR 80 161 s 4 SOR 86 4 53 s 3 SOR 91 593 s 1 REAR IMPACT GUARDS STANDARD 223 Interpretation
125. d truck in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 shall have the same meaning as in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations 2 For the purposes of this section the definition motor vehicle in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 does not apply 3 Subject to subsections 4 to 13 each piece of glazing material for use in a vehicle except a trailer other than a http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 66 de 131 bus trailer shall meet the requirements of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 4 In the event of any inconsistency or conflict between the requirements for items 1 to 16B listed in section 4 2 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 and the requirements shown in Table 1 of that Standard the latter shall prevail 5 Any glazing material for use in a multi purpose passenger vehicle shall meet the requirements specified in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 for glazing material for use in trucks 5 1 Any glazing material for use in a three wheeled vehicle shall meet the requirements specified in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 for glazing materials for use in passenger cars 6 Despite section 6 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 the exposed edges of tempered glazing material installed in school buses need not be banded 7 Instead of using the procedures described in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 for tests 1 and 16 described in that Standard
126. d dimensions which shall meet the requirements of section 4 1 of standard AIAG B 2 Vehicle Identification Number Label Standard June 1988 2 3 Every bar coded vehicle identification number shall be displayed on a the vehicle s compliance or information label or b a separate label that is applied beside the compliance or information label in accordance with paragraphs 7 a and b of these Regulations 2 4 If the vehicle identification number is displayed on a label in a bar code format it need not until September 1 2012 also be applied to the vehicle in accordance with paragraph 115 2 b but may at the option of the manufacturer be sunk into embossed on or imprinted clearly and indelibly on a any part of the vehicle that is not designed to be removed except for repair other than glazing or b a separate plate or label that is permanently affixed to a part referred to in paragraph a 3 The vehicle identification number of any vehicle shall be alphanumeric and shall be composed of 17 characters as follows a the first three characters the third of which shall not be 9 shall uniquely identify the manufacturer and the class of vehicle if the manufacturer manufactures 1 000 or more vehicles of a prescribed class annually a 1 the first three characters the third of which shall be 9 and the twelfth to fourteenth characters shall uniquely identify the manufacturer and the class of vehicle if the
127. d of the seating reference point of the front outboard designated seating position displaced vertically 19 mm 0 75 inches or a distance equal to the rise in the seating reference point that results from a 130 mm 5 inch forward adjustment of the seat and b the impact shall be directed in a vertical plane parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle or in a plane normal to the surface at the point of contact 3 2 Subsection 3 does not apply to a console assemblies b areas less than 130 mm 5 inches from the junction of the instrument panel and the inside of the side structure of the body c areas closer to the junction of the windshield and the instrument panel than those areas that are capable of being contacted by the head form with the windshield in place d areas outboard of all points on the line of contact of the head form with the instrument panel when the head form is moved along the inboard side of a vertical longitudinal plane tangent to the inboard edge of the steering wheel or e areas below any point at which a vertical line is tangent to the rearmost surface of the instrument panel 4 Subject to subsection 4 1 the seats of a vehicle shall be constructed so that the deceleration of a spherical head http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 64 de 131 form with a weight of 6 8 kg 15 pounds and a diameter of 165 mm 6 5 inches does not exceed 80 g
128. d of view provided by the System A convex mirror c in the case of a mirror installed on the side opposite the driver s side of cylinders A and B placed in accordance with subsection 25 and d in the case of a mirror installed on the driver s side of cylinders A and C placed in accordance with subsection 25 22 The images of cylinders A B and C placed in accordance with subsection 25 that are reflected in each System B mirror shall meet the following requirements a the shortest angular width of the image shall be no less than 3 minutes of arc measured using the following equation X D 2 0 000873 where X is the width of the image of the cylinder on the reflective surface http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 52 de 131 D is the distance between the centre point of the driver s eye position and the centre of the reflective surface and 0 000873 is the tangent of 3 minutes of arc and b the shortest angular length of the image shall be no less than 9 minutes of arc measured using the following equation Y D 2 0 002618 where Y is the length of the image of the cylinder on the reflective surface D is the distance between the centre point of the driver s eye position and the centre of the reflective surface and 0 002618 is the tangent of 9 minutes of arc 23 For the purposes of subsection 22 a comparison chart such as the one shown in
129. da for special purposes shall file with the Minister prior to importation a declaration signed by the person or the person s duly authorized representative containing the information set out in Schedule VII SOR 79 940 s 4 SOR 88 536 s 1 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 97 376 s 3 SOR 2000 182 s 3 SOR 2002 55 s 9 SOR 2003 2 s 47 IMPORTATION OF A VEHICLE PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES 12 1 The company contracted to the Department of Transport to establish and operate the national program of vehicle inspection certification and registration to be known as the registrar of imported vehicles is the person designated for the purposes of subsection 7 2 of the Act 2 Subsection 7 2 of the Act does not apply to a person who is a company referred to in paragraph a or b of the definition company in section 2 of the Act 3 For the purposes of subsection 7 2 of the Act a person may import into Canada a vehicle referred to in that subsection where the following conditions are met a in the case of a vehicle other than a restricted use motorcycle a snowmobile or a snowmobile cutter the vehicle was manufactured by a company to conform to the applicable United States federal laws on the date of manufacture as shown on the American compliance labels on the vehicle or on a written statement from each company that manufactured the vehicle a 1 in the case of a snowmobile the vehicle was manufactured by a
130. dance with Test Method 301 2 CNG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 a in the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less i by the vehicle impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at any angle of up to 30 in either direction to the perpendicular to the vehicle s line of travel while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h ii by a collision barrier travelling at 48 km h impacting the vehicle from the rear and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 121 de 131 iii by a collision barrier travelling at 32 km h impacting the vehicle laterally on either side and b in the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg by a moving contoured barrier assembly travelling at any speed up to and including 48 km h impacting the vehicle at any point and any angle 1 1 Instead of being tested in accordance with subparagraph 1 a ii a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may be tested in accordance with paragraph S6 2 b of TSD 301 except for the fuel spillage requirements under the applicable conditions set out in sections 3 2 to 3 4 of Test Method 301 2 CNG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 and paragraph S7 3 b of TSD 301 1 2 Instead of being tested in accordance with subparagraph 1 a iii a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may be tested in accordance with paragraph S6 3 b of TSD
131. dance with the Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods Section 903 C dolly October 1 1992 published by the Department of Transport a the axis of rotation of a turntable type steering mechanism shall not deviate from the vertical by more than 0 5 degree b the kingpin axes of an automotive type steering mechanism shall not deviate from the vertical by more than 0 5 degree http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 126 de 131 c the steering mechanism shall keep the wheels within one degree of the straight ahead position when the steering mechanism is subjected to i a lateral force of 22 320 N that is applied to a point located 50 mm behind the centre of the tire contact patch or ii a longitudinal force of 8 930 N that is applied through the centre of one of the tires in the case of a C dolly that is equipped with one tire on each side and through the centre of one of the dual tires and wheel assemblies in the case of a C dolly that is equipped with two tires on each side and d the steering mechanism shall not permit the wheels to move beyond one degree from the straight ahead position unless the steering mechanism is subjected to a force exceeding the force referred to in subparagraph c i or ii 7 Where a C dolly is equipped with a pressurized hydraulic or pneumatic system that provides the means referred to in paragraph 1 b the system shall a be independent of t
132. dard equipment and carrying its maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and includes the mass of any air conditioning equipment on the vehicle and the amount by which the mass of any optional engine with which the vehicle is equipped exceeds the mass of the standard engine masse vide curb weight means the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment and carrying its maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and includes the weight of any air conditioning equipment on the vehicle and the amount by which the weight of any optional engine with which the vehicle is equipped exceeds the weight of the standard engine poids a vide custom restraint system for disabled persons Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 cutaway chassis means an incomplete vehicle that has the back of the cab cut out for the intended installation of a structure that permits access from the driver s area to the back of the vehicle chassis tronqu daytime running lamp means for the purposes of section 108 of Schedule IV a lamp used to improve the visibility of a vehicle when the vehicle is viewed from the front in daylight feu de jour demountable rim means a supporting member for a tire or tire and tube assembly that does not have a permanently attached centre component jante amovible designated seating capacity means the number of designated seating positions provided in a vehicle or in the case of a motor home that has a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg may
133. de de s curit ANSI Z26 1990 ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 means the American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle Equipment Operating on Land Highways Safety Standard Standard ANSI SAE Z26 1 1996 published on August 11 1997 norme de s curit ANS Z26 1996 anthropomorphic test device means except in section 202 of Schedule IV a representation of a human being used in the measurement of the conditions that a human being would experience in a vehicle when the vehicle is subjected to approved test methods dispositif anthropomorphe d essai http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 2 de 131 antilock brake system or ABS means the portion of a service brake system that automatically controls the degree of rotational wheel slip during braking by a sensing the rate of angular rotation of the wheels b transmitting signals regarding the rate of wheel angular rotation to one or more controlling devices that interpret those signals and generate responsive controlling output signals and c transmitting those controlling signals to one or more modulators that adjust brake actuating forces in response to those signals dispositif de frein anti blocage ouABS antilock system Repealed SOR 97 200 s 1 antique reproduction vehicle means a vehicle that is designed to be a scaled reproduction of an antique
134. detachable upper torso restraint and b is capable of adjustment by means of an emergency locking retractor 3 A vehicle that has a rear outboard designated seating position that has a seat that can be adjusted to face forward and to face in any other direction may be equipped with a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that a when the seat is placed in any direction in which it can be occupied while the vehicle is in motion has a pelvic restraint that can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor and b when the seat is placed in the forward facing direction has a Type 2A shoulder belt that can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor 4 A vehicle that has a rear outboard designated seating position that has a seat designed by the manufacturer to be removable shall meet the requirements of subsection 2 or where the seat can be adjusted to face forward and to face in any other direction the requirements of subsection 3 5 A seat belt assembly required pursuant to subsection 4 may be detachable at either its upper or lower anchorage point but not at both anchorage points 6 Subject to subsection 9 every vehicle other than a bus that has a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg or a school bus shall be equipped with a Type 1 or Type 2 manual seat belt assembly at each designated seating position other than a front outboard designated seating position or a rear outboard designated seating position 7 The s
135. diagonale de type 2A unit magnification mirror means a plane or flat mirror with a reflective surface through which the angular height and width of the image of an object is equal to the angular height and width of the object when viewed directly at the same distance except for flaws that do not exceed normal manufacturing tolerances and includes a prismatic day night adjustment rearview mirror that provides unit magnification in one of its positions miroir plan unleaded gasoline means gasoline that contains not more than a 0 06 grams of lead per Imperial gallon 0 013 grams per litre or b 0 006 grams of phosphorous per Imperial gallon 0 0013 grams per litre essence sans plomb unloaded vehicle mass means the mass of a vehicle equipped with the containers for the fluids necessary for the operation of the vehicle filled to their maximum capacity but without cargo or occupants masse du v hicule sans charge unloaded vehicle weight means the weight of a vehicle equipped with the containers for the fluids necessary for the operation of the vehicle filled to their maximum capacity but without cargo or occupants poids du v hicule sans charge upper torso restraint means a portion of a seat belt assembly intended to restrain movement of the chest and shoulder regions ceinture baudrier used vehicle Repealed SOR 91 425 s 1 user ready tether anchorage means a device that transfers tether strap loads from a restrai
136. e a checking device that has the envelope dimensions shown in Figure 10 of Schedule 10 to the Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations are attached to the lower part of a restraint system or booster cushion in a manner that does not allow for their removal without the use of tools and enable the restraint system or booster cushion to be securely attached to a lower universal anchorage system of a vehicle syst me d attaches inf rieures lower universal anchorage system means a device other than a vehicle seat belt that is designed to secure the lower part of a restraint system or booster cushion to a vehicle and that transfers loads from the restraint system or booster cushion and its occupant to the vehicle structure or seat dispositif universel d ancrages d attaches inf rieurs low speed vehicle means a vehicle other than a restricted use motorcycle or a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes that a is designed for use primarily on streets and roads where access and the use of other classes of vehicles are controlled by law or agreement b travels on four wheels c is powered by an electric power train an electric motor and if present a transmission that is designed to allow the vehicle to attain a speed of 32 km h but not more than 40 km h in a distance of 1 6 km on a paved level surface d does not use fuel as an on board source of energy and e has a GVWR of less than 1 36
137. e en jaune sur fond noir ou Bordure rouge texte en noir sur fond jaune _3G7DA03E41 503870 x Surles remorques le libell est le suivant Le poids du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ib Figure 2 Vehicle Placard Unilingual French Example Optional Alphanumeric Identifier 13 14 Yellow Text on Black Background or or Barcode mm x 14 mm E 0 51 x 0 55 Black Text on Yellow Background Identificateur 0 51 po x 0 55 po Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou alphanum rique texte en noir sur fond jaune ou code barres optionnel l SEATING CAPACITY FRONT REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES ins L AVANT ARRI RE The combined welghtof occupants and cargo should never exceed kg or Iba Le polds total des occupants et du chargement ne doit Jamala d passer xxx kg cu XXX Ipa ET SIE OBRESSION DES gt DIMENSIONS PNEUS FROID RO pqgsi7oRt4 200 kPa 29 psi REA 3G7DA03E41S5038 70 EAR ARRI RE P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi DE SECOURS T 125 70D 15 420 kPa 60 psi Yellow Text on Black Background or Red Border Black Text on Yellow Background Bordure rouge Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou texte en noir sur fond jaune For trailers this statement should read The weight of cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs Sur les remorques le libell est le suivant Le poids du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ib http laws justice gc c
138. e fuel system after each impact from the moment of the impact until one half hour after motion of the vehicle ceases shall not exceed 142 g b the temperature corrected pressure in the high pressure portion of the fuel system shall not decrease to less than 95 per cent of the initial system pressure during the one half hour period after motion of the vehicle ceases and c the fuel container shall remain attached to the vehicle at a minimum of one attachment point 3 Instead of complying with subsections 1 and 2 a vehicle other than a school bus that is equipped with a fuel system that uses LPG as a source of energy for its propulsion may comply with a the version of National Standard of Canada CAN CGA 12 2 Propane Fuel System Components for Use on Highway Vehicles that despite any statement to the contrary in that Standard is in effect 24 months before the date of the last manufacturing operation performed by the manufacturer who installed the fuel system as shown on the manufacturer s information label or the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle as shown on the compliance label or a more recent version of that Standard and b section 4 Installation of Propane Fuel Systems and Tanks on Highway Vehicles of the version of National Standard of Canada CAN CGA B149 5 Installation Code for Propane Fuel Systems and Tanks on Highway Vehicles that is in effect 24 months before the date of the last manufacturing operation p
139. e of not less than 75 per cent and not more than 92 per cent of the normal operating voltage b where combined with the lower beam of a headlamp that is designed to conform to the photometric requirements of section 108 1 operate at normal operating voltage or i in the case of a DC system not less than 86 per cent and not more than 92 per cent of the normal operating voltage and ii in the case of an AC system or a modulated voltage system the equivalent root mean square of not less than 86 per cent and not more than 92 per cent of the normal operating voltage and c where combined with the upper beam of a headlamp be designed to provide a luminous intensity of not less than 2 000 cd and not more than 7 000 cd at test point H V 49 For the purpose of determining if a daytime running lamp conforms to subsection 48 the daytime running lamp shall be tested in accordance with section S11 of TSD 108 50 A daytime running lamp that is optically combined with a headlamp or headlamps in which two filaments operate together to provide the daytime running lamp function shall meet the photometric requirements of paragraph 48 c when a the daytime running lamp is provided by i an upper beam that is provided by two filaments in the headlamp ii an upper beam and a lower beam of the headlamp or iii an upper beam of the headlamp and a lower beam or upper beam of another headlamp and b the luminous intensities at the test po
140. e that is automatically activated the lamps referred to in paragraph b i shall come on automatically and remain on in all ambient light conditions or ii shall come on automatically in dark ambient light conditions 59 Despite section S5 5 1 of TSD 108 the lower beams and upper beams of the headlamps may be activated simultaneously when the headlamps are in use as daytime running lamps 60 Despite section S5 5 10 d of TSD 108 daytime running lamps may be wired to flash for signalling purposes Visibility 61 Daytime running lamps that are not optically combined with another lamp required by this section shall be located at the same height as far apart as practicable and not less than 380 mm and not more than 2 110 mm above the road surface measured from the H V axis of the lamp with the vehicle at curb mass 62 A daytime running lamp shall be visible from any point contained within the solid angle bounded by vertical planes 20 degrees to the left and right of and horizontal planes 10 degrees above and below the H V axis of the lamp 63 Where the distance measured on a vertical transverse plane from the H V axis of a front turn signal lamp to the exposed edge of the lens of a daytime running lamp that is not optically combined with the turn signal lamp is less than 100 mm a the turn signal lamp shall conform to the photometric requirements of Table 3 of SAE Standard J588 Turn Signal Lamps for Use on Motor Vehicles Less T
141. e the distance is measured in inches 3 Every bus other than a school bus and a bus manufactured for the purpose of transporting persons under physical restraint shall be provided with unobstructed openings for rapidly urgent egress the combined areas of which when measured a in square centimetres is equal to at least 430 times the number of designated seating positions on the bus or b in square inches is equal to at least 67 times the number of designated seating positions on the bus 4 A minimum of 40 per cent of the combined areas of the unobstructed openings required by subsection 3 shall be provided on each side of the bus 5 In determining the combined areas of unobstructed openings provided in a bus no emergency exit regardless of its actual area shall be deemed to measure more than 3 450 cm 536 square inches 6 Subject to subsection 7 the unobstructed openings required by subsection 3 shall be provided in every bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib by a at least one side door for each three designated seating positions in the vehicle or b side exits and at least one rear emergency exit that meets the requirements of subsections 11 to 14 when the bus is upright and when it is overturned on its side and any occupant is standing facing the rear emergency exit 7 Where the configuration of a bus described in subsection 6 precludes the installation of an accessible rear emergency exit
142. e weight of 2 495 kg or less c bus other than a school bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less and d school bus 2 This section does not apply to a a walk in van b a bus that has only one row of forward facing designated seating positions rearward of the driver s seat c a vehicle that is not equipped with a manual cut off switch to deactivate the frontal air bag that is installed at the right front outboard designated seating position when any restraint system or booster cushion is installed and i has only one row of forward facing designated seating positions ii cannot accommodate because of the location of transmission or suspension components the installation of the bars of a lower universal anchorage system to permit the attachment to them of a child restraint fixture as shown in Figure 1 in a seating position located to the rear of the first row of seating positions or iii has no seating position located to the rear of the first row of seating positions that is able to accommodate a child restraint fixture shown in Figures 2 to 4 or d a hearse http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 88 de 131 General 3 A lower universal anchorage system consists of two straight horizontal bars that a are transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle b have a diameter of 6 mm 0 1 mm and a length measured in accordance with Figure 12 of not less than 25
143. e with the photometric requirements prescribed by that paragraph shall be the sum of the value shown in column 1 of Figure 29 of TSD 108 and the angle by which the material deviates from the vertical measured at the horizontal centreline of the sheeting 23 The retroreflective sheeting applied to the rear of a trailer pursuant to section S5 7 1 4 1 c of TSD 108 shall be http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 41 de 131 located not more than 760 mm above the road surface and extend to within 450 mm of the extreme outer edges of the trailer 24 Where a vehicle is equipped with yellow retroreflective sheeting the sheeting shall meet the photometric requirements set out in the following table TABLE Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection cd Ix m2 Entrance Angle in Item Grade degrees Observation Angle of 0 2 Observation Angle of 0 5 1 DOT C2 4 188 49 2 DOT C2 30 188 49 3 DOT C2 45 45 11 4 DOT C3 4 124 32 5 DOT C3 30 124 32 6 DOT C3 45 30 8 7 DOT C4 4 94 25 8 DOT C4 30 94 25 9 DOT C4 45 23 6 Headlighting Requirements Section S7 of TSD 108 25 For the purposes of these Regulations the DOT symbol marked on the lens of a headlamp or of a beam contributor pursuant to section S7 2 a of TSD 108 indicates that the headlamp or beam contributor conforms to TSD 108 26 Despite section S5 1 1 of TSD 108 sections S7 3 7 a a
144. e world production of vehicles is 2 500 or more a year may be filed with the Minister http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 16 de 131 quarterly SOR 95 494 s 1 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING 5 2 The gross vehicle weight rating of a vehicle shall be not less than the sum of a the unloaded vehicle mass b the cargo carrying capacity c the product obtained by multiplying the designated seating capacity by 54 kg in the case of a school bus or by 68 kg in any other case and d in the case of a vehicle having living or sanitary accommodations the mass of its fresh water hot water and propane tanks but not its waste water tanks when full SOR 98 125 s 2 SOR 2008 258 s 2 COMPLIANCE LABEL 6 1 Subject to subsections 1 1 and 6 6 1 a company that manufactures a vehicle of a prescribed class that is a completed vehicle and that meets the requirements of these Regulations shall ensure that the vehicle unless it is a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes bears a compliance label displaying at least a the name of the manufacturer of the completed vehicle b the month and year the manufacture of the completed vehicle was complete c a drawing at least 13 mm in diameter depicting the national safety mark as set out in Schedule and showing in its centre in figures at least 2 mm in height the authorization number assigned by the Minister to the c
145. each tie down point SOR 2003 359 s 4 SCHEDULE V Repealed SOR 2003 2 s 48 SCHEDULE V 1 Section 5 SOR 97 141 s 4 SOR 97 421 s 15 NOISE EMISSIONS STANDARD 1106 Interpretation 1 The definitions in this section apply in this Schedule and in the documents referred to in this Schedule dBA means the A weighted sound level in decibels measured using a sound level meter or a sound data acquisition system referred to in Appendix A of Test Method 1106 Noise Emission Tests August 2005 that uses the values set out in Table 1 of that Appendix dBA http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 128 de 131 decibel or dB means 20 times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of the measured sound pressure relative to a reference sound pressure of 20 Pa d cibel oudB rated engine speed or maximum rated engine speed means the rotational speed of an engine in revolutions per minute RPM at which the maximum horsepower of the engine is attained r gime maximal nominal rated engine speed oumaximum rated engine speed sound level means the root mean square of the values measured in dBA that are recorded during testing conducted pursuant to this section niveau sonore SOR 2005 342 s 6 Exterior Sound Level 2 Every vehicle other than a motorcycle or a vehicle referred to in section 4 shall be so constructed that a where tested in accordance with A
146. ealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 SAE means the Society of Automotive Engineers Inc SAE International SAE SAE Compatibility Fluid Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 school bus means a bus designed or equipped primarily to carry students to and from school autobus scolaire scuffing Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 sealed beam headlamp means for the purposes of sections 108 and 108 1 of Schedule IV a headlamp comprising a reflector a lens and one or more light sources forming an integral whole which is indivisibly formed and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable projecteur scell seat anchorage means any component that transfers a vehicle seat load to the vehicle structure ancrage du si ge seat back retainer Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 seat belt anchorage means any component of a vehicle other than the webbing or straps involved in transferring seat belt loads to the vehicle structure including the attachment hardware seat frames seat pedestals the vehicle structure and any part of the vehicle whose failure causes separation of the belt from the vehicle structure ancrage de ceinture de s curit seat belt assembly means any strap webbing or similar device designed to secure a person in a vehicle in order to mitigate the results of any accident and includes all necessary buckles and other fasteners and all attachment hardware ceinture de s curit seating reference point mea
147. eat belt assembly referred to in subsection 6 shall a in the case of a Type 1 or Type 2 manual seat belt assembly have a pelvic restraint that can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor an automatic locking retractor or a manual adjusting device and b in the case of a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly have an upper torso restraint that can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor or a manual adjusting device 8 A walk in van that has a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less may be equipped at the driver s designated seating position with a Type 1 manual seat belt assembly that can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor or an automatic locking retractor 9 A truck or multi purpose passenger vehicle that has a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg a may be equipped at each front outboard designated seating position with a Type 1 manual seat belt assembly and b shall be equipped at each forward facing rear outboard designated seating position with a Type 1 or Type 2 manual seat belt assembly 10 A bus that has a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg shall be equipped at the driver s designated seating position with a Type 1 manual seat belt assembly or a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly the upper torso restraint of which can be adjusted by means of an emergency locking retractor 10 1 In the case of a motor home the number of designated seating positions with seat belts shall not be less than the number of sleep
148. ecified on the label or plaque that must be affixed to a snowmobile pursuant to paragraph 12c 6 of those Standards and any instructions that are provided with a snowmobile shall be provided in both official languages 6 Every snowmobile shall be equipped with the emergency stop switch set out in the Standards referred to in subsection 1 and headlamps that are on continuously when the engine of the snowmobile is operating SOR 87 497 s 3 SOR 87 660 s 6 SOR 96 360 s 2 SOR 97 532 s 4 SOR 2000 182 s 9 SOR 2003 359 s 5 SNOWMOBILE CUTTERS STANDARD 1202 1202 1 Every snowmobile cutter shall be equipped with a rigid tow bar that when connected to a snowmobile is a rigidly connected to the cutter so as to prevent yawing movement b capable of 90 degrees of rolling movement in each direction in relation to the longitudinal vertical plane of the cutter and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 130 de 131 c capable of allowing adequate pitching movement of the cutter 2 Snowmobile cutters shall be equipped with the following reflex reflectors located not more than 760 mm above the ground measured to the centre of the reflex reflectors with the cutter at curb mass a on the rear the reflex reflectors referred to in SAE Recommended Practice J292 Snowmobile and Snowmobile Cutter Lamps Reflective Devices and Associated Equipment May 1995 and b on each side a
149. ections 55 and 56 daytime running lamps shall be on continuously when the engine is operating and the master lighting switch is not in the headlamps on position 55 Daytime running lamps may switch off a while the automatic transmission control is in the park or neutral position b while the parking brake is applied or c after the engine is started but prior to the vehicle being set in motion for the first time 56 A daytime running lamp that is optically combined with a turn signal lamp shall switch off while the turn signal lamp is switched on as a turn signal or hazard warning signal 57 Daytime running lamps shall switch off a whenever the master lighting switch is moved to the headlamps on position and b where the lamps are on a vehicle equipped with concealable headlamps and the master light switch is moved to the headlamps on position once the headlamps attain the fully open position 58 Where the lower beams of the headlamps operating at normal operating voltage are used as daytime running lamps a it shall not be possible to activate the upper beams of the headlamps except for signalling purposes b where there is a tell tale that is automatically activated and visible to the driver in dark ambient light conditions to indicate that the tail lamps licence plate lamps side marker lamps and parking lamps are switched off those lamps shall not come on automatically and c where there is no tell tal
150. ed course competition or b is accompanied by a signed declaration clearly indicating that the vehicle is a competition vehicle and is for use exclusively in closed course competition v hicule de comp tition completed vehicle means a vehicle that needs no further manufacturing operations to perform its intended function other than the addition of readily attachable components such as mirrors or tire and rim assemblies or minor finishing operations such as painting v hicule complet compliance label means the label required to be applied to a completed vehicle under section 6 or 6 6 tiquette de conformit http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 4 de 131 compressed natural gas or CNG means natural gas composed predominantly of methane compressed at pressures up to 20 680 kPa 3 000 psi gaz naturel comprim orGNC contactable surface Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 control means the part of a device that enables the driver to bring about a change in the state or functioning of a vehicle or vehicle component commande convertible means a vehicle that has an A pillar or windshield peripheral support the upper portion of which is not joined by a fixed rigid structure to the B pillar or other rear roof support to the rear of the B pillar d capotable CSA means the Canadian Standards Association CSA curb mass means the mass of a vehicle with stan
151. ed zone means the space displayed in the figure to this section and enclosed as set out in subsection 6 zone prot g e protected zone template means a template cut or formed from type DB cut cell styrofoam to the dimensions of the protected zone gabarit de zone prot g e 2 This section does not apply in respect of a a truck multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus with a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg or http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 112 de 131 b a vehicle having a forward control configuration a walk in van or an open body type vehicle with a fold down or removable windshield 3 A vehicle to which this section applies shall be tested a by impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at 90 5 to the line of travel of the vehicle while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h and b in accordance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 208 23 a and c 4 During the test referred to in subsection 3 no part of the vehicle outside the occupant compartment other than the windshield mouldings or other components designed to be normally in contact with the windshield glazing shall penetrate a the windshield protected zone template to any depth in excess of 6 mm or b the inner surface of the portion of the windshield glazing that is within the DLO below the windshield protected zone 5 T
152. eed 60 mm and d the axially transmitted force through each upper leg of each anthropomorphic test device shall not exceed 10 kN 23 Subject to subsection 23 1 when a vehicle is tested it shall be tested a in accordance with the conditions set out in Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 b by impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at 90 5 to the line of travel of the vehicle while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h and c with an anthropomorphic test device that complies with the Code of Federal Regulations of the United States title 49 part 572 subpart E October 1994 placed at each front outboard designated seating position and secured by the seat belt assembly at that position 23 1 For the purposes of paragraph 23 a when a three wheeled vehicle is tested it shall be loaded in accordance with paragraph S2 2 1 of Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 Air Bags 24 An air bag shall have a monitoring system that a monitors and indicates its own readiness and the readiness of every air bag that has not been deactivated and b is equipped with a tell tale visible to the driver seated in the normal driving position 25 Passenger cars three wheeled vehicles trucks buses and multi purpose passenger vehicles may be equipped with a manual air bag cut off switch to deact
153. emove slack or tension 17 1 Despite subsection 17 in the case of a bus the strength requirement tests may be carried out when the vehicle seat is not installed in the vehicle if a the user ready tether anchorage is installed on the vehicle seat in accordance with the tether anchorage positioning requirements of section 210 1 for a designated seating position of the vehicle b the structure on which the seat is installed the seat anchorage and all associated hardware are equivalent to those used when the vehicle seat is installed in the vehicle and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 90 de 131 c a rearward force of 135 N 15 N is applied to the centre of the lower front crossbar of the test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 to press the test device against the seat back as the position of the lower connectors of the test device is adjusted to remove slack or tension Information Respecting Lower Universal Anchorage Systems 18 Subject to subsections 19 and 20 if a lower universal anchorage system is not visible along a line making an upward angle of at least 30 with the horizontal plane without compression of the seat cushion or seat back of the seating position the presence of each bar of the system shall be indicated by the symbol shown in Figure 10 consisting of a circle containing a pictogram which symbol shall meet the following conditions a the pictogram s
154. ems Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of More Than 4 536 kg 121 Air Brake Systems Motorcycle Brake Systems Controls and Displays Motorcycles x Accelerator Control Systems School Bus Pedestrian Safety Devices 135 Light Vehicle Brake Systems 201 Occupant Protection Head Restraints Driver Impact Protection and Steering Control System Steering Column Rearward Displacement x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Glazing Materials x x Door Locks and Door Retention Components Anchorage of Seats x x x Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact x x 209 Seat Belt Assemblies x X X X 210 Seat Belt http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 29 de 131 Assembly Anchorages X X X X X X User ready Tether Anchorages for Restraint Systems k Lower Universal Anchorage Systems for Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Windshield Mounting Built in Child Restraint Systems and Built in Booster Cushions Side Door Strength Bumpers 216 Roof Intrusion Protection 17 2 Bus Window Retention Release and Emergency Exits Windshield Zone Intrusion 19 220 Rollover Protection 221 School Bus Body Joint Strength School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash Protection 2 2 Rear Impact
155. eparate completely from the vehicle structure or seat structure 8 When the seat belt anchorages for the pelvic portion and for the upper torso portion of a Type 2 seat belt assembly are tested for strength in accordance with Test Method 210 Seat Belt Anchorages January 2006 by simultaneously applying a force of 13 345 N none of the seat belt anchorages shall separate completely from the vehicle structure or seat structure 9 Repealed SOR 2003 57 s 1 10 Seat belt anchorages for designated seating positions that face in the same direction shall be tested by simultaneously loading the seat belt assemblies attached to the anchorages where the anchorages are a common to the same seat or b laterally adjacent but not common to the same seat and at least one of the anchorages is located within 305 mm of the anchorage for the adjacent seating position as measured between the vertical centrelines of the bolt holes or in designs using another means of attachment to the vehicle structure the centroids of those means Information Respecting Restraint Systems 11 The English and French versions of the owner s manual for a three wheeled vehicle passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle bus or truck with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less and rear designated seating positions other than a school bus shall contain a statement indicating that children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infa
156. ere none of the compliance labels referred to in paragraph 3 a is applied to the vehicle in the appropriate location referred to in subsection 6 3 b be resistant to or protected against any weather condition to which the label may be exposed and c have lettering that is i clear and indelible ii indented embossed or in a colour that contrasts with the background colour of the label and iii in block capitals and numerals not less than 2 mm in height 10 Where any compliance label referred to in paragraph 3 a is not applied to the vehicle a statement that indicates that the vehicle was manufactured to conform to the applicable United States federal laws on the date of manufacture shall be displayed on the label referred to in subsection 8 or on a label applied beside that compliance label SOR 80 441 s 1 SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 96 90 s 1 SOR 2000 304 s 3 SOR 2002 55 s 10 SOR 2003 272 s 5 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 307 s 1 APPLICATIONS FOR EXEMPTION 13 1 Any company applying for an exemption pursuant to section 9 of the Act shall submit in writing to the Minister a its name and address b the province or country under the laws of which it is established c the number title and text or substance of the standards from which exemption is sought and the duration of that exemption d the reason for requesting an exemption e if applicable the reasons for withholding from public disclosure a
157. erformed by the manufacturer who installed the fuel system as shown on the manufacturer s information label or the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle as shown on the compliance label or a more recent version of that Standard except that the following requirements do not apply i any requirement to obtain an approval from an authority having jurisdiction or an inspection authority of a province or territory and ii any requirement for the inspection or requalification of a fuel system or tank after the main assembly of the vehicle has been completed 3 1 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses LPG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall comply with the standards referred to in subsection 3 4 A manufacturer of a vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses LPG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall provide to the Minister on request information respecting the version of the standard referred to in subsection 3 with which the vehicle complies 5 Repealed SOR 2004 89 s 2 SOR 82 754 s 3 SOR 97 421 s 17 SOR 2001 152 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 18 SOR 2003 272 s 29 SOR 2004 89 s 2 SOR 2008 104 s 20 CNG FUEL SYSTEM INTEGRITY STANDARD 301 2 301 2 1 Subject to subsections 3 and 3 1 a vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall meet the requirements of subsection 2 when tested in accor
158. ernational Organization for Standardization ISO International Standard ISO 2575 entitled Road Vehicles Symbols for controls indicators and tell tales 4th edition 1982 20 A tell tale or indicator listed in Table II to this section shall be activated a at the beginning of the vehicle s operating condition to which it relates or b in the case of a seat belt tell tale as required by section 208 of this schedule TABLE TABLEAU SYMBOLS FOR IDENTIFYING CONTROLS SYMBOLES D IDENTIFICATION DES COMMANDES Control Identification Commande Clearance lamps identification lamps and side Feux de gabarit feux d identification et feux de position aP A marker lamps D lat raux Master lighting switch Commutateur g n ral d clairage Headlamp upper and lower beams 1 Faisceaux route et faisceaux croisement des projecteurs 3 Turn signals Windshield wiper E Essuie glace de pare brise Windshield washer Lave glace de pare brise Windshield wiper and washer Essuie glace et lave glace de pare brise combin s Heating and air conditioning fan Ventilateur du systeme de chauffage et de climatisation Hazard warning signal Signal des feux d avertissement Windscreen defogging and defrosting D givrage et d sembuage du pare brise http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 34 de 131 Rear window defogging and defrosting Op D givrage et d sembuage de la lunette arri
159. es affected by the notice of defect and the number of such vehicles in each identifying classification b a chronology of all principal events that led to the determination of the existence of the defect and c copies of all notices bulletins and other circulars issued by the company in respect of the defect including a detailed description of the nature and physical location of the defect with diagrams and other illustrations as necessary 3 For the purposes of subsection 10 6 of the Act the quarterly reports to be submitted following the report referred to in subsection 2 shall contain the following information a the number title or other identification assigned by the company to the notice of defect b the revised number of vehicles affected by the notice of defect if applicable c the date that notices of defect were given to the current owners of the affected vehicles and d the total number or percentage of vehicles repaired including vehicles requiring inspection only SOR 95 147 s 2 SOR 98 524 s 3 SOR 2008 104 s 3 TEST METHODS 15 1 1 Documents that contain motor vehicle safety test methods shall be published by the Department of Transport under the main title Test Method followed by an identification number a descriptive title and the publication date 2 Repealed SOR 2008 104 s 4 SOR 97 141 s 2 SOR 97 421 s 16 SOR 2008 104 s 4 TECHNICAL STANDARDS DOCUMENTS 16 1 For the purpos
160. es of section 12 of the Act every technical standards document including all of the amendments to it shall be published by the Department of Transport and have the main title Technical Standards Document followed by an identification number a descriptive title and the publication date 2 Repealed SOR 2008 104 s 5 SOR 96 366 s 3 SOR 97 421 s 16 SOR 2008 104 s 5 17 The Department of Transport shall publish a notice in the Canada Gazette Part each time the Department amends a technical standards document SOR 96 366 s 3 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 27 de 131 18 and 19 Repealed SOR 95 147 s 2 20 Repealed SOR 93 274 s 2 21 and 22 Repealed SOR 95 147 s 2 SCHEDULE Section 6 and paragraphs 6 2 1 g and 6 4 1 e SOR 95 147 s 3 SOR 2002 55 s 11 SCHEDULE II Section 3 Department of Transport Motor Vehicle Safety Act subsection 3 2 Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations section 3 MINISTERIAL AUTHORIZATION Pursuant to the Motor Vehicle Safety Act and the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations company name and address is authorized to use and apply the national safety mark and the authorization number to any vehicle of a class referred to in section 4 of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations on condition that the vehicle and its components conform to all the applicable Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards The
161. es to use a tire inflation pressure label on one placard and one label as shown in Figures 3 and 6 or b in each official language on two vehicle placards as shown in Figures 1 and 2 or if the manufacturer chooses to use a tire inflation pressure label on two placards and two labels as shown in Figures 1 2 4 and 5 and affixed at the same location on the vehicle but apart 3 The information specified in section S4 3 f of TSD 110 that appears on a vehicle placard and at the manufacturer s option on a tire inflation pressure label in accordance with paragraph 2 a shall appear either a in the form of the symbol number N 03 for Operator s manual operation instructions that is included in International Standard ISO 2575 entitled Road vehicles Symbols for controls indicators and tell tales 7th edition May 1 2004 or b in both official languages on one placard as shown in Figure 3 or on one placard and one label as shown in Figures 3 and 6 4 The information specified in section S4 3 f of TSD 110 that appears on a vehicle placard and at the manufacturer s option on a tire inflation pressure label in accordance with paragraph 2 b shall appear either a in the form of the symbol number N 03 specified in paragraph 3 a or b in each official language on two placards as shown in Figures 1 and 2 or on two placards and two labels as shown in Figures 1 2 4 and 5 and affixed at the same location on the
162. est shall be conducted at a point on the centreline of each head restraint with the head restraint in place at its lowest adjusted position and d in the case of a type of seat that is installed in more than one body style tests conducted at the foremost and rearmost positions identified by the application of paragraph a shall be deemed to be conclusive for all intermediate positions 4 1 Subsection 4 does not apply in respect of a seats installed in a school bus that complies with section 222 when tested in accordance with Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods section 222 School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash Protection December 19 1983 b the rearmost seats c side facing seats d back to back seats e folding auxiliary jump seats and f temporary seats 5 Subject to subsection 7 every interior compartment door located in an instrument panel console seatback or side panel adjacent to an outboard designated seating position shall remain closed when a the interior compartment door latch system is tested by being subjected to a force equal to an inertia load of 10 gin a horizontal transverse direction and an inertia load of 10 gin a vertical direction in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice Passenger Car Side Door Latch Systems SAE J839 July 1982 b one of the following tests is conducted namely i the vehicle is tested by being impacted perpendicularly into a fixed collision bar
163. except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing not to scale Figure 1 Interface Profile of Tether Strap Hook http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 78 de 131 a a a E 20 minimum a 4 Us 20 Minimum Notes 1 Dimensions in mm 2 Drawing not to scale 3 Symbol may be embossed 4 Colour of the symbol is at the option of the manufacturer Figure 2 Symbol Used to Identify the Location of a User ready Tether Anchorage That Is under a Cover http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 79 de 131 M Plane a cross section Strap wrap around length from V Point 250 Vertical longitudinal plane W Point R Plane Rr Point cross section gt V Point H Point Strap wrap around lengen from Vi Point 200 Torso line reference piane a it angie e Line represents the vehicle specific floor pan surface within the prescribed ul intersection of torso line zone reference plane and floor pan Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Portion of user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook to be located within shaded zone Drawing not to scale R Point Shoulder reference point V Point V reference point 350 mm vertically above and 175 mm horizontally back f
164. f 1 700 mm can enter the occupant compartment in an upright position by a front door fourgon acc s en position debout weather side Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 webbing means a narrow band of fabric woven with continuous filling yarns and finished selvages sangle wet ERBP Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 work vehicle means a vehicle designed primarily for the performance of work in the construction of works of civil engineering and in maintenance that is not constructed on a truck chassis or truck type chassis but does not include a tractor or any vehicle designed primarily to be drawn behind another vehicle v hicule de travail 5th percentile adult female means a person having as physical characteristics a mass of 46 3 kg height of 1499 mm erect sitting height of 785 mm normal sitting height of 752 mm hip sitting breadth of 325 mm hip sitting circumference of 925 mm waist sitting circumference of 599 mm chest depth of 191 mm bust circumference of 775 mm chest upper circumference of 757 mm chest lower circumference of 676 mm knee height of 455 mm popliteal height of 356 mm elbow rest height of 180 mm thigh clearance height of 104 mm buttock to knee length of 518 mm buttock to poples length of 432 mm elbow to elbow breadth of 312 mm and seat breadth of 312 mm 5 percentile adulte du sexe f minin 50th percentile adult male means a person having as physical characteristics a mass of 74 4 kg plus or minus 1 4
165. f 500 N c applied initially along a line above the horizontal line at an angle of 10 5 to it d attained within 30 seconds at any onset force rate of not more than 135 000 N s and e maintained at a level of 11 000 N for a minimum of one second Test Requirements 16 If a bench seat in a bus or a row of designated seating positions in another vehicle has more than one lower universal anchorage system and a distance of 400 mm or more measured in accordance with Figure 9 separates the midpoints of any adjacent designated seating positions the force referred to in subsection 13 or 15 shall be applied simultaneously to each anchorage system in the manner specified in that subsection 17 The strength requirement tests shall be carried out under the following conditions a the vehicle seat is installed in the vehicle b the vehicle seat is adjusted to its full rearward and full downward position c the vehicle seat back is adjusted in the nominal design riding position d the head restraints if installed at a designated seating position that is equipped with a lower universal anchorage system are adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and e a rearward force of 135 N 15 N is applied to the centre of the lower front crossbar of the test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 to press the test device against the seat back as the position of the lower connectors of the test device is adjusted to r
166. f the seating reference point and c beginning with the head form of the measuring device at each contact point referred to in paragraph b and with the measuring device in a vertical position if no contact point exists for a particular adjusted length by pivoting the measuring device forward and downward through all arcs in vertical planes to 90 each side of the longitudinal plane through the seating reference point until the head form contacts an interior surface or until it is tangent to a horizontal plane 25 mm 1 inch above the seating reference point whichever occurs first zone d impact de la t te interior compartment door means any door in the interior of a vehicle installed by the manufacturer as a cover for storage space normally used for personal effects porte de compartiment int rieur measuring device means a device having a spherical head form with a diameter of 165 mm 6 5 inches attached to a pivot with the distance between the pivot point and the top of the head form being adjustable at any point between 740 mm 29 inches and 840 mm 33 inches appareil de mesure pelvic impact area means that area of the door or body side panel adjacent to any outboard designated seating position that is bounded by a horizontal planes 180 mm seven inches above and 100 mm four inches below the seating reference point and b vertical transverse planes 200 mm eight inches forward and 50 mm two inches rearward of t
167. f the portion of the anchorage designed to bind with the tether strap hook were located within the shaded zone b is at least 65 mm behind the torso line in the case of a non rigid webbing type routing device or a deployable routing device or at least 100 mm behind the torso line in the case of a fixed rigid routing device and c when tested after being installed as it is intended to be used is of sufficient strength to withstand with the user ready tether anchorage the force referred to in subsection 8 Strength Requirements 8 Subject to subsection 10 every user ready tether anchorage in a row of designated seating positions shall when tested withstand the application of a force of 10 000 N a applied by means of one of the following types of test devices installed as a child restraint system would be in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer s installation instructions namely i a test device shown in Figures 12 to 16 or ii a test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 of section 210 2 in the case of a designated seating position having a lower universal anchorage system b applied i in a forward direction parallel to the vehicle s vertical longitudinal plane through the X point on the test device and ii initially along a line above the horizontal line at an angle of 10 5 to it c attained within 30 seconds at any onset force rate of not more than 135 000 N s and d maintained at a 10 000 N
168. face without http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 65 de 131 permitting contact with any rigid material and ii so that the vertical height of any rigid material between 13 mm 0 5 inches and 32 mm 1 25 inches from the panel surface is not less than 25 mm 1 inch and c when measured vertically in side elevation provide at least 50 mm 2 inches of coverage within the pelvic impact area along not less than 50 mm 2 inches of its length 10 Each arm rest that folds into the seat back or between two seat backs of a vehicle shall a comply with subsection 9 or b be constructed of or covered with energy absorbing material SOR 83 138 s 2 SOR 86 453 s 2 SOR 92 689 s 1 SOR 94 374 s 5 F SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 97 447 s 4 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E HEAD RESTRAINTS 202 1 Subject to subsection 2 every multi purpose passenger vehicle bus or truck with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less every passenger car and every three wheeled vehicle shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 202 Head Restraints TSD 202 as amended from time to time 2 Until August 31 2012 a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may conform to the requirements of this section as it read on the day before the day on which this version of the section came into force 3 This section expires on March 1 2014 SOR 95 60 s 2 SOR 2003 272 s 21 SOR 2006 94 s 4
169. fer to a bus iv BT RA to refer to a bus trailer v CD CCC to refer to a C dolly vi EMC MCH to refer to an enclosed motorcycle vii HHT RL to refer to a heavy hauler trailer viii LSM MVL to refer to a limited speed motorcycle ix LDD CRC to refer to a load divider dolly ix 1 LSV VBV to refer to a low speed vehicle x MH AC to refer to a motor home xi MC to refer to an open motorcycle xii MPV VTUM to refer to a multi purpose passenger vehicle xiii PC VT to refer to a passenger car xiv RUM MUR to refer to a restricted use motorcycle xv SB AS to refer to a school bus http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 17 de 131 xvi TRA REM to refer to a trailer xvii TCD CDC to refer to a trailer converter dolly xviii TRI to refer to a motor tricycle xix TRU CAM to refer to a truck xx TT CT to refer to a truck tractor xxi TWV VTR to refer to a three wheeled vehicle and xxii SNO MNG to refer to a snowmobile g in the case of a C dolly the mounting height expressed in both official languages of the coupling when the C dolly is not loaded and h in the case of a trailer that is designed to tow a C dolly the mounting height expressed in both official languages of the coupling when the trailer is not loaded
170. fifth wheel coupling and one or two drawbars but does not include a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes chariot de conversion transparent cover Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 truck means a vehicle designed primarily for the transportation of property or special purpose equipment but does not include a competition vehicle a crawler mounted vehicle a three wheeled vehicle a trailer a work vehicle a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes a vehicle designed for operation exclusively off road or a low speed vehicle camion truck tractor means a truck designed primarily for drawing other vehicles and not constructed for carrying any load other than a part of the weight of the vehicle and load drawn and includes a vehicle designed to accept a fifth wheel coupling but does not include a crane equipped breakdown vehicle camion tracteur Type 1 Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 type 1 headlamp Repealed SOR 91 692 s 1 Type 1 seat belt assembly means a pelvic restraint ceinture de s curit de type 1 Type 2 Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 type 2 headlamp Repealed SOR 91 692 s 1 Type 2 seat belt assembly means a combination pelvic and upper torso restraint ceinture de s curit de type 2 Type 2A Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 Type 2A shoulder belt means an upper torso restraint for use only in conjunction with a pelvic restraint to constitute a Type 2 seat belt assembly ceinture
171. first row of seating positions in a multi purpose passenger vehicle that has more than two rows of seating positions but at least one lower universal anchorage system must be installed in a seating position in the second row of seating positions d in two forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those in a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 24 or fewer designated passenger seating positions e in four forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those in a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 25 or more but 65 or fewer designated passenger seating positions f in eight forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those in a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 66 or more designated passenger seating positions and g in two forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver in a bus other than a school bus 5 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 9 6 A lower universal anchorage system shall be installed only at a designated seating position that is equipped with a user ready tether anchorage except in the case of a convertible or an open body type vehicle 7 The number of lower universal anchorage systems required in a veh
172. fy or b during a bulb check conducted when the engine is turned on 15 Notwithstanding subsections 13 and 14 if the headlamp upper beam tell tale is illuminated when the upper beam headlamps are operated as daytime running lamps at reduced voltage the headlamp upper beam tell tale shall emit light of an intensity that is discernibly lower than the intensity of the light emitted when the upper beam headlamps are operated at regular voltage except that the headlamp upper beam tell tale may flash at full intensity in the event of a malfunction of the daytime running lamps 16 Illumination that is provided in the driver s compartment of a vehicle and that is not subject to subsection 7 10 or 13 shall a have a means of being turned off b be manually or automatically adjustable to provide at least two levels of brightness or c be of an intensity such that it is barely discernible to a driver whose eyes have adapted to dark ambient roadway conditions 17 Speedometers shall be calibrated in kilometres per hour 18 Odometers and trip record counters shall be calibrated in kilometres 18 1 Notwithstanding subsection 18 the odometer and trip record counter may be calibrated in miles if a label is applied in the vicinity of the odometer stating that the vehicle odometer reads in miles 19 In addition to the identification required by subsections 5 and 9 a manufacturer may use the symbols that are included in Int
173. g line 2 5 Ler The distance between the rearward surface of the front seat back and the forward surface of the rear seat back Notes 1 Adjustable seats are in the adjustment position midway between the forwardmost and rearmost positions and if separately adjustable in a vertical direction are at the lowest position If an adjustment position does not exist midway between the forwardmost and rearmost positions the closest adjustment position to the rear of the midpoint is used 2 Place adjustable seat backs in the nominal design riding position as recommended by the manufacturer in the manner specified by the manufacturer Place adjustable anchorages in the nominal design riding position recommended by the manufacturer for a 50th percentile adult male occupant Place each adjustable head restraint in its highest adjustment position Adjustable lumbar supports are positioned so that the lumbar support is in its least firm adjustment position Figure 6 Distance Between Rows of Designated Seating Positions http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Notes TO to X Point Pagina 95 de 131 Tether strap attachment paint 300 PR PS 320 Side view Back view See detail B 6 mm washer or plate under bolt head RES KA O Ke K ks Pe 2 55 7 EEEE 210 T OOK 26 2 Es gt
174. g position where a longitudinal vertical plane tangent to the outboard side of the seat cushion is less than 305 mm from the innermost point on the inside surface of the vehicle which point is located vertically between the seating reference point and the shoulder reference point and longitudinally between the front and rear edges of the seat cushion place assise d sign e ext rieure overall width means the nominal design dimension of the widest part of the vehicle with doors and windows closed and wheels in the straight ahead position exclusive of signal lamps marker lamps outside rearview mirrors flexible fender extensions and mud flaps argeur hors tout parking brake means a mechanism designed to prevent the movement of a stationary vehicle frein de stationnement parking mechanism Repealed SOR 99 357 s 1 passenger car means a vehicle having a designated seating capacity of 10 or less but does not include an all terrain vehicle a competition vehicle a low speed vehicle a multi purpose passenger vehicle an antique reproduction vehicle a motorcycle a truck a trailer a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes or a three wheeled vehicle voiture de tourisme passenger car tire means a tire intended for use on passenger cars multi purpose passenger vehicles and trucks with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less pneu pour voiture de tourisme passive occupant protection Repealed SOR 93 5 s 1 passive restra
175. gaged by the use of an accelerator controller power assistance immediately ceases when the brakes are applied and iv it is incapable of providing further assistance when the bicycle attains a speed of 32 km h on level ground e bears a label that is permanently affixed by the manufacturer and appears in a conspicuous location stating in both official languages that the vehicle is a power assisted bicycle as defined in this subsection and f has one of the following safety features i an enabling mechanism to turn the electric motor on and off that is separate from the accelerator controller and fitted in such a manner that it is operable by the driver or ii a mechanism that prevents the motor from being engaged before the bicycle attains a speed of 3 km h bicyclette assist e power operated roof panel Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 power operated roof panel system means a panel or panels in the roof of a vehicle that move on slides or hinges the opening or closing of which is operated by a power source within the vehicle but does not include a convertible top system syst me de toit ouvrant commande lectrique prescribed class means a class of vehicle listed in Schedule III or the class of incomplete vehicle prescribed under subsection 4 1 1 cat gorie r glementaire prime glazing material manufacturer Repealed SOR 2002 187 s 1 production options mass Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 production
176. gine compartment from the occupant space but excluding the bumpers and chassis frame carrosserie d autobus maintenance access panel means a body panel that must be moved or removed to provide access to serviceable components panneau d acc s pour l entretien serviceable component means any part of a bus of either a mechanical or electrical nature that is explicitly identified in the owner s manual or factory service manual as requiring routine maintenance actions at intervals of one year or less Tubing wires and harnesses are considered to be serviceable components only at their attachments l ment n cessitant de l entretien 2 This section applies in respect of all school bus body panel joints that lie rearward of the vertical transverse plane located 762 mm in front of the forward most passenger seating reference point except those that contact or are attached to or in close proximity to a components such as rub rails that are entirely outside of body panels b doors windows ventilation panels engine access covers or destination sign covers c trim or decorative parts that do not contribute to the strength of a body panel joint d interior maintenance access panels that are 305 mm or less when measured across any two points on the diametrically opposite sides of the opening or e all exterior maintenance access panels 3 Subject to subsection 4 when tested in accordance with Test Method 221 School Bu
177. gure 10 is marked on a seat back seat cushion or cover over the lower universal anchorage system an explanation that the symbol indicates the presence of a lower universal anchorage system and a reproduction of the symbol b Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 9 c an identification by means of the symbol shown in Figure 10 or any other mark used to indicate the presence of a lower universal anchorage system as applicable of the designated seating positions that are equipped with a lower universal anchorage system d if the vehicle is equipped with a foldable system instructions on how to deploy the system e if the vehicle is equipped with head restraints at the seating positions equipped with a lower universal anchorage system instructions on the correct manner of adjusting the head restraints for use with user ready tether anchorages and f if the vehicle has more than one row of designated seating positions a statement that children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 91 de 131 A Pitch Child Restraint Fixture Seat Back Seating Reference Point 15 10 Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing notto scale Figure 1 Lower Universal Anchorage System Positioning http laws jus
178. hall be legible to the driver in daylight when the indicator lamp is activated but the legend referred to in section S5 1 3 1 d of TSD 122 is optional 4 The vehicle mass referred to in section S6 1 of TSD 122 is limited to a maximum value equal to the GVWR of the motorcycle 5 Despite sections 5 4 5 5 S7 6 S7 7 and S7 8 of TSD 122 a limited speed motorcycle is not exempt from the test requirements set out in those sections 6 Despite section S6 6 of TSD 122 the wind velocity shall not be greater than 5 m s 7 For the purposes of section S7 6 2 of TSD 122 if a motorcycle is incapable of attaining the required test speed it shall be tested at the speed attainable in 1 61 km Expiry Date 8 This section expires on January 1 2010 SOR 81 88 s 3 SOR 88 268 s 9 SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 2001 255 s 1 SOR 2003 272 s 18 SOR 2005 42 ss 3 4 MOTORCYCLE CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS STANDARD 123 SOR 93 31 S 4 SOR 2007 180 S 9 123 1 Every motorcycle except those designed and sold exclusively for use by law enforcement agencies shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 123 Motorcycle Controls and Displays TSD 123 as amended from time to time 2 Every motorcycle shall be equipped with the following controls a a horn b a fuel tank shutoff valve c a twist grip throttle d a front wheel brake e a rear wheel brake and an ignition switch 3 The ignition swit
179. hall contrast with the background of the circle b the circle shall contrast with its background namely the seat back or seat cushion of the vehicle c its centre shall be located no more than 25 mm from the vertical longitudinal plane that passes through the centre of each bar of the system d it shall be marked on the seat back or on the seat cushion of the vehicle in accordance with Figure 11 and e it shall be permanently marked by any means in a manner that makes it impossible to remove without defacing or destruction 19 In the case of a foldable lower universal anchorage system its presence shall be indicated by the symbol shown in Figure 10 marked in accordance with subsection 18 or marked on the mechanism for deploying each bar of the foldable system and visible at the junction of the seat back and the seat cushion when the system is in the folded position 20 In the case of a lower universal anchorage system hidden by one or more covers its presence may be indicated by the symbol shown in Figure 10 marked on each cover in the following cases a the covers are not entirely removable or b the system is visible in accordance with subsection 18 if the covers are entirely removed 21 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 9 22 The English and French versions of the owner s manual for a vehicle that is equipped with a lower universal anchorage system shall contain the following information a if the symbol shown in Fi
180. han 2032 mm in Overall Width November 1984 using a luminous intensity multiplier of 2 5 b the luminous intensity of the daytime running lamp shall not be more than 2 600 cd at any point in the beam or c the daytime running lamp shall switch off while the turn signal lamp is flashing 64 The inner surface of a transparent component through which light emitted by a daytime running lamp that conforms to subsection 51 passes shall be accessible for cleaning without the use of any tool designed specifically for vehicles 65 A daytime running lamp shall meet the requirements of sections S5 1 3 and S5 3 of TSD 108 Date of Expiration http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 44 de 131 66 This section expires on January 1 2010 SOR 79 306 s 3 SOR 80 636 s 2 SOR 84 812 s 3 SOR 86 979 s 1 SOR 87 497 s 2 SOR 87 660 s 4 SOR 88 268 s 5 SOR 91 692 s 2 SOR 94 374 s 5 SOR 94 692 s 2 F SOR 95 147 s 8 SOR 95 164 s 5 SOR 96 366 s 5 SOR 97 421 ss 16 18 E 22 F SOR 99 112 s 1 SOR 99 426 s 1 SOR 2000 182 s 5 SOR 2001 60 s 1 SOR 2001 116 s 1 SOR 2001 353 s 2 SOR 2003 272 s 10 SOR 2005 42 ss 1 2 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 104 s 12 ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR HEADLAMPS SOR 96 366 S 6 108 1 1 As an alternative to the headlamps required by section 108 of this Schedule passenger cars multi purpose passenger vehi
181. hand throttle the hazard warning switch the headlamp upper or lower beam switch k the horn the ignition switch m the illumination intensity control n the master lighting switch o the parking brake pedal or lever p the rear window defog and defrost control q the service brake pedal or lever r the steering wheel s the transmission control except for the transfer case t the turn signal control u the windshield defog and defrost system control v the windshield washing system control w the windshield wiping system control x the clearance lamps switch and y the identification lamps switch 2 Where fitted on a vehicle the displays for the following functions and malfunctions shall be fitted in such a manner that they are identifiable by the driver while the driver is seated in the driver s designated seating position with the driver s seat belt fastened around the driver in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions a the headlamp upper beam b the tum signals c the hazard warning signal d a seat belt e the fuel level f the engine oil pressure http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 31 de 131 g the engine coolant temperature h the battery charging condition a brake system malfunction j an air brake low pressure k an antilock brake system malfunction a variable brake p
182. he brake system of the C dolly b be fitted with a pressure gauge that indicates i the minimum pressure required to meet the requirements of paragraphs 1 b and 6 c and a and ii the amount of pressure in the system and c not permit any adjustment of the steering force 8 Every C dolly referred to in subsection 7 shall bear a label in both official languages that states the minimum pressure referred to in paragraph 7 b 9 Every pressure gauge referred to in subsection 7 and every manual valve and switch if any that forms part of a system referred to in that subsection and every label referred to in subsection 8 shall be protected from adverse weather conditions 10 Every C dolly that is subjected to a torsion test conducted in accordance with the Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods Section 903 C dolly October 1 1992 published by the Department of Transport shall have a torsional stiffness of at least 3 000 N m degree with respect to the longitudinal direction and shall be capable of sustaining a torque of at least 45 000 N m in either direction without incurring a residual deformation that exceeds 0 5 degree 11 Where a C dolly is equipped with a device that is intended to lock the steering mechanism automatically according to the speed of the C dolly that device shall a lock the steering mechanism in the straight ahead position when the C dolly is travelling at a speed of 60 km h and keep the steer
183. he lower boundary of the windshield protected zone displayed in the figure to this section shall be determined as follows a place a rigid sphere having a diameter of 165 mm and a mass of 6 8 kg in such a position that it simultaneously contacts the inner surface of the windshield glazing and the surface of the instrument panel including any padding and if the positioning of the sphere is obstructed by steering controls or other accessories or equipment the accessories or equipment may be removed while the sphere is being positioned b draw the locus of points on the inner surface of the windshield glazing contacted by the sphere across the width of the instrument panel and from the outermost of those points of contact extend the locus line horizontally to the edges of the glazing material c draw a line on the inner surface of the windshield glazing below and at a distance of 13 mm from the locus line drawn in accordance with paragraph b d project the line drawn in accordance with paragraph c longitudinally on the outer surface of the windshield glazing and the resulting line is the lower boundary of the windshield protected zone 6 The windshield protected zone displayed in the figure to this section is the space enclosed by a the outer surface of the windshield glazing b the locus of points 76 mm outward along perpendiculars drawn to each point on the outer surface of the windshield glazing and c the locus of line
184. he seating reference point zone d impact pelvienne 2 This section applies to passenger cars and to multi purpose passenger vehicles trucks and buses with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 pounds or less 3 Subject to subsection 3 2 the instrument panel of a vehicle shall be constructed so that the deceleration of a spherical head form with a weight of 6 8 kg 15 pounds and a diameter of 165 mm 6 5 inches does not exceed 80 g continuously for more than 3 ms when the area of the instrument panel that is within the head impact area is impacted in accordance with the test procedure referred to in subsection 3 1 at a relative velocity of a 19 3 km h in the case of a vehicle that is equipped at the right front outboard designated seating position with an air bag and a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that conform to section 208 and b 24 km h 15 mph in the case of any other vehicle 3 1 The test of the instrument panel shall be performed in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice Motor Vehicle Instrument Panel Laboratory Impact Test Procedure Head Area SAE J921b November 1971 and using the instrumentation whose performance is specified in SAE Recommended Practice Instrumentation For Impact Tests SAE J211 October 1988 except that a the origin of the line tangent to the surface of the instrument panel shall be a point on a transverse horizontal line through a point 130 mm 5 inches horizontally forwar
185. he sheet metal of the vehicle OVERLAP BETWEEN THE O TWO SYSTEM 8 MIRRORS A7 VA N3 SYSTEM 8 MIRROR ON Ky E ie A D A SYSTEM B MIRROR ON ORVER S SIDE SYSTEM 8 MIRROR ON DRIVERS SIDE SYSTEM B WIRROR ON SIDE OPPOSTE THE ORIVER S SIDE BETWEEN OVERLAP BETWEEN SYSTEM A SYSTEM A CONVEX CONVEX MIRROR AND SYSTEM amp MIRROR AND SYSTEM 8 HIRROR ON SIDE OPPOSITE MIRROR ON DRIVER S SIDE DRIVERS it A CONVIDE REAR AXLE CENTERUNE ORVERSSOE dl ESSE eat SYSTEM A CONVEX MIRROR ON SIDE OPPOSITE THE DRIVERS SOE SYSTEM A UNIT MAGNIFICATION SYSTEM A UNIT MIRROR ON DRIVERS SIDE MAGNIFICATION MIRROR ON SIDE OPPOSITE THE DRIVERS SIDE http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 54 de 131 FIGURE 1 Fields of View of System A and System B Mirrors XXX ws PES 9 a lt ni AEREAS MINUTES OF ARC MINUTES OF ARC NOT ACTUAL SIZE NOTE CALCULATE THE DIMENSIONS OF THE REFERENCES USING THE EQUATIONS SET OUT IN SUBSECTION 11 1 22 FIGURE 2 Comparison Chart SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 80 439 s 3 SOR 82 918 s 1 SOR 87 658 s 2 SOR 88 268 s 6 SOR 95 147 s 9 SOR 97 463 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 13 SOR 2002 448 s 1 SOR 2003 272 s 14 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 72 s 2 111 1 Repealed SOR 87 658 s 2 112 Repealed SOR 2001 353 s 3 HOOD LATCH SYSTEM 113 1 In this section hood means any exterior movable body panel forward of the windshie
186. her as a source of energy for its propulsion shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 301 Fuel System Integrity TSD 301 as amended from time to time 2 A school bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg that is equipped with a fuel system that uses a fuel with a boiling point of 0 C or higher as a source of energy for its propulsion shall conform to the requirements of TSD 301 3 Instead of being tested in accordance with S6 2 a and S6 3 a of TSD 301 a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may at the option of the manufacturer be tested in accordance with S6 2 b and S6 3 b of TSD 301 before September 1 2009 4 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 80 158 s 1 SOR 97 421 s 17 SOR 2001 152 s 2 SOR 2004 89 s 1 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 258 s 10 SOR 2009 79 s 5 LPG FUEL SYSTEM INTEGRITY STANDARD 301 1 301 1 1 Subject to subsections 3 and 3 1 a vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses LPG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall meet the requirements of subsection 2 when tested in accordance with Test Method 301 1 LPG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 120 de 131 a in the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less i by the vehicle impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at any angle of up to 30 in either direction to the perpendic
187. hicle Seat Belt Anchorages Design Recommendations June 1995 with reference to an H point template described in section 4 1 of SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 where a the H Point of the template is located at the unique Design H Point of the seat as defined in section 3 11 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions February 2001 at the full rearward and full downward position of the seat and b the torso line of the template is at the same angle to the vertical plane as the seat back with the seat adjusted to its full rearward and full downward position and the seat back in its most upright position 6 In the case of each adjustable seat belt anchorage for the upper end of an upper torso restraint the mid point of the range of adjustment of the anchorage or the position that is suitable for a 50th percentile adult male if that position is specified in the owner s manual shall be located within the range referred to in subsection 5 Strength Requirements 7 Except in the case of side facing seats when the seat belt anchorages for a Type 1 seat belt assembly or for the pelvic portion of a Type 2 seat belt assembly that is equipped with a detachable upper torso restraint are tested for strength in accordance with Test Method 210 Seat Belt Anchorages January 2006 by applying a force of 22 241 N none of the seat belt anchorages shall s
188. horage system for a given seating position SgRP seating reference point Notes 1 Drawing not to scale 2 The midpoint of a designated seating position lies in the vertical longitudinal plane that is equidistant from the vertical longitudinal planes through the geometric centre of each of the two bars of the lower universal anchorage system installed at the seating position For those designated seating positions that do not have the lower universal anchorage system bars the midpoint of a designated seating position lies in the vertical longitudinal plane that passes through the SgRP of the seating position 3 The distance shall be measured between the vertical longitudinal planes passing through the midpoints of adjacent designated seating positions along a line perpendicular to the planes Figure 20 Measurement of Distance Between Adjacent Designated Seating Positions for Use in Simultaneous Testing SOR 86 975 s 2 SOR 92 545 s 5 SOR 94 669 s 3 SOR 95 536 s 7 SOR 98 457 s 3 SOR 2000 44 ss 1 to 3 SOR 2002 205 s 3 SOR 2003 272 s 26 SOR 2006 94 ss 2 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 15 SOR 2008 72 s 8 LOWER UNIVERSAL ANCHORAGE SYSTEMS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEMS AND BOOSTER CUSHIONS STANDARD 210 2 Application 210 2 1 Subject to subsection 2 this section applies to every a passenger car a 1 three wheeled vehicle b multi purpose passenger vehicle and truck with a GVWR of 3 856 kg or less and an unloaded vehicl
189. ical plane that is 2 m 6 6 feet to the right of and perpendicular to a vertical plane tangent to the bus s most outboard surface iii cylinder C shall be placed on the driver s side at a point where the cylinder is entirely visible through the convex mirrors of both System A and System B on that side so that its centre falls in a vertical plane that is 2 m 6 6 feet to the left of and perpendicular to a vertical plane tangent to the bus s most outboard surface iv cylinder D shall be placed on the side opposite the driver s side so that its centre falls in the vertical plane that passes through the centreline of the bus s rear wheel axle and that is 2 m 6 6 feet to the right of the bus s most outboard surface and v cylinder E shall be placed on the driver s side so that its centre falls in the vertical plane that passes through the centreline of the bus s rear wheel axle and that is 2 m 6 6 feet to the left of the bus s most outboard surface b every mirror shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations to the driver s eye position and is not to be moved or readjusted during testing for that eye position but may be readjusted for subsequent tests for different eye positions c a still or video camera shall be positioned so that its image plane is located at the driver s eye point in such a manner that the reflective surface is visible to the camera through the windows of the bus
190. icant Low brake fluid condition Manufacturer s option ROUGE 5 Bas niveau de liquide de frein choix du fabricant Gross loss of brake pressure Manufacturer s option ROUGE 5 Perte totale de pression du syst me condition de freinage choix du fabricant Brake lining wear out Manufacturer s option 5 Usure des garnitures de frein condition choix du fabricant YELLOW Automatic transmission Manufacturer s option Position de la commande de la boite control position chai du isbiicant de vitesses automatique Speedometer km h Compteur de vitesse http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Low tire pressure that does YELLOW not identify which tire has low pressure including tire pressure monitoring system malfunction Low tire pressure that identifies which tire has low pressure including tire pressure monitoring system malfunction Pagina 35 de 131 JAUNE Faible pression des pneus qui n indique pas dans quel pneu la pression est faible y compris le mauvais fonctionnement du systeme de surveillance de la pression des pneus Faible pression des pneus qui indique dans quel pneu la pression est faible y compris le mauvais YELLOW JAUNE fonctionnement du syst me de surveillance de la pression des pneus Mauvais fonctionnement du systeme Tire pressure monitoring YELLOW TPMS JAUNE system malfunction de surveillance de la pression des pneus 1 Framed areas
191. ice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 20 de 131 c a statement in both official languages that the company is an intermediate manufacturer d the month and year in which the intermediate manufacturer performed its last manufacturing operation on the incomplete vehicle and e in the case of a vehicle manufactured in Canada for sale in Canada a drawing of at least 20 mm in diameter depicting the national safety mark set out in Schedule and showing in its centre in figures of at least 2 mm in height the authorization number assigned by the Minister to the company under section 3 2 The drawing referred to in paragraph 1 e may be displayed on a label applied to the vehicle beside the intermediate manufacturer s information label 3 If the information label applied to an incomplete vehicle by the previous manufacturer is not in a location described in paragraph 6 2 2 a or b a the information label shall be applied in a location specified in paragraph 6 2 2 a or b or in a conspicuous and readily accessible location if it is impracticable to conform to paragraph 6 2 2 a or b and b subject to subsection 4 the information label shall display the GVWR and GAWRs set out on the label applied by the previous manufacturer 4 If an intermediate manufacturer increases the GVWR or the GAWRs above those referred to in paragraphs 6 1 1 d and e the intermediate manufacturer sh
192. icle under subsection 4 may be reduced by the number of built in child restraint systems installed in the vehicle 8 Except in the case of a bus if the distance between the rearward surface of the front seat back and the forward surface of the rear seat back is less than 720 mm as measured in accordance with Figure 6 a lower universal anchorage system may be installed in a designated passenger seating position in the first row of designated seating positions instead of in the second row of designated seating positions if the vehicle is equipped with the manual cut off switch referred to in paragraph 2 c 9 A vehicle that is equipped with a seat that slides sideways or that can be installed in any other seating position in the vehicle shall meet the requirements of this section with the seat adjusted in any adjustment position 10 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 9 Lower Universal Anchorage System Positioning 11 Each bar of the lower universal anchorage system shall be installed so that a child restraint fixture can be attached to the system as shown in Figure 1 12 For the purposes of subsection 11 the vehicle seat shall be adjusted to its full rearward and full downward position with the seat back in the nominal design riding position and the child restraint fixture shown in Figures 2 and 3 or in Figure 4 installed in the seat Strength Requirements 13 A lower universal anchorage system installed in a row of designated seati
193. ics type de carrosserie bonded construction sealed beam headlamp Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 booster cushion Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 brake fluid Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 brake hose Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 brake hose assembly Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 3 de 131 brake hose end fitting Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 brake power assist unit means a device installed in a hydraulic brake system that reduces the amount of muscular force that a driver must apply to actuate the system and that if inoperative does not prevent the driver from braking the vehicle by a continued application of muscular force on the service brake control unit d assistance de frein brake power unit means a device installed in a brake system that provides the energy required to actuate the brakes either directly or indirectly through an auxiliary device with driver action consisting only of modulating the energy application level unit de servo frein braking interval means the distance measured from the point of initiation of one brake application to the point of initiation of the next brake application intervalle de freinage buckle means a quick release connector that secures a person in a seat belt assembly attache built in booster cushion means a device that is designed as an integral part of a vehicle seati
194. ile is tested instead of using the version of the approved tests set out in the Supplement referred to in paragraph 1 b the manufacturer may use the version of those tests that is in effect on January 1 of the calendar year in which the snowmobile is manufactured 1 2 For the purposes of this section the word snowmobile used in the Standards and Supplement referred to in subsection 1 has the same meaning as in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations 2 Notwithstanding the definition Designed or Designed to referred to in section 4 of the Standards referred to in subsection 1 and for the purposes of those Standards and the Supplement referred to in that subsection Designed and Designed to shall mean designed and constructed in such a manner so as to conform to the performance requirements of those documents under normal conditions of operation 3 The use of the word should in paragraph 10c 4 of the Standards referred to in subsection 1 and of the word will in those Standards and the Supplement referred to in that subsection shall be considered to create an obligation 4 The reference to the Supplement referred to in subsection 1 shall be interpreted as excluding the statements that set out a recommended practice or guideline by using for example the auxiliary should 5 The statement required pursuant to paragraph 12c 2 of the Standards referred to in subsection 1 the information sp
195. inches or more below the top of the seat back or restraining barrier surface de contact head protection zones means the spaces in front of each school bus passenger seat that are not occupied by any sidewall window or door structure and that in relation to that seat and its seating reference point are enclosed by the following planes a horizontal planes 300 mm 12 inches and 1 016 mm 40 inches above the seating reference point b a vertical longitudinal plane tangent to the inboard aisle side edge of the seat c a vertical longitudinal plane 83 mm 3 25 inches inboard of the outboard edge of the seat and d vertical transverse planes through and 760 mm 30 inches forward of the seating reference point zone de protection de la t te leg protection zones means those parts of a school bus passenger seat back or restraining barrier that are bounded by horizontal planes 300 mm 12 inches above and 100 mm four inches below the seating reference point of the school bus passenger seat immediately behind the seat back or restraining barrier zone de protection des jambes school bus passenger seat means a seat in a school bus other than the driver s seat or a seat that is installed to accommodate a handicapped or convalescent passenger and is oriented in a direction that is more than 45 degrees to the left or right of the longitudinal centre line of the vehicle si ge pour passager d autobus scolaire W means the n
196. incomplete vehicle that are identified by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer for example CMVSS 104 This vehicle when completed will conform to Standard 104 Windshield Wiping and Washing System if no alterations are made to the windshield or the windshield wiping and washing system ii a statement that the completed vehicle will conform to the standard if the vehicle is manufactured in accordance with the conditions specified by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer for example CMVSS 121 This vehicle when completed will conform to Standard 121 Air Brake Systems if it does not exceed any of the GAWRs if the centre of gravity at GVWR is not higher than 2 75 m above the ground and if no alterations are made in any brake system component and iii a statement that conformity to the standard cannot be determined based upon the components that are fitted on the incomplete vehicle and that the incomplete vehicle manufacturer makes no representation as to conformity with the standard 2 The document shall be kept in a weather resistant container that is attached to the vehicle in a conspicuous and readily accessible location or it may be sent directly to an intermediate manufacturer a final stage manufacturer or other purchaser as the case may be http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 19 de 131 SOR 2002 55 s 5 INCOMPLETE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER S INFORMATION LABEL 6 2
197. ing mechanism locked when the C dolly is travelling at a speed greater than 60 km h and b unlock the steering mechanism when the C dolly is travelling at a speed of 50 km h and keep the steering mechanism unlocked when the C dolly is travelling at a speed less than 50 km h 12 Every C dolly shall a have a flat surface that is horizontal when the C dolly is not loaded and when the centre of the coupling on the C dolly is held at the mounting height in accordance with the manufacturer s design and b bear a label in both official languages that states i that the steering mechanism should be locked when the C dolly is travelling at a speed of 60 km h or more on any slippery or unpaved road and that the steering mechanism should be unlocked when the C dolly is travelling at a speed of 50 km h or less and ii that the C dolly shall not be attached to a straight truck 13 The flat surface referred to in paragraph 12 a shall be a at least 30 cm in length measured longitudinally b at least 5 cm in width measured laterally c accessible from both sides of the C dolly and d within 50 cm of the coupling of the C dolly SOR 93 146 s 4 SOR 2008 104 s 22 C DOLLY HITCH REQUIREMENTS 904 1 Every trailer that is designed to tow a C dolly shall be equipped with a coupling to connect the trailer to the C dolly 2 Where a coupling referred to in subsection 1 consists of a single component the coupling shall have
198. ing positions 11 Where a Type 1 manual seat belt assembly or the pelvic restraint portion of a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly is installed at a front outboard designated seating position of a truck bus or multi purpose passenger vehicle that has a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg the seat belt assembly shall be capable of adjustment by means of an emergency locking retractor or an automatic locking retractor 12 An automatic locking retractor referred to in paragraph 7 a and subsections 8 and 11 shall a engage the next locking position when a length of seat belt webbing between 19 mm and 77 mm has moved into the retractor as measured from an initial position determined by extending the seat belt webbing to 75 per cent of its total length from the retractor and b if used on a vehicle seat that has a suspension system be attached to the suspended portion of the vehicle seat Seat Belt Fit Requirements 13 A Type 2 manual seat belt assembly shall be constructed such that when a 50th percentile adult male occupant is secured in place by the seat belt assembly the intersection of the upper torso restraint and the pelvic restraint shall be at least 150 mm from the front vertical centreline of the occupant measured along the centreline of the pelvic restraint with a any upper torso restraint manual adjusting device adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b the seat adjusted to its rearmost and lowest posit
199. ing reference point in the forward direction such that a the horizontal distance between the restraining barrier s rear surface and the seating reference point of the seat in front of which it is required is not more than 610 mm 24 inches b the position and rear surface area of the restraining barrier shall be such that in a front projected view of the bus each point of the barrier s perimeter coincides with or lies outside of the perimeter of the seat back of the seat for which it is required and c when subjected to a forward force as specified in the test methods referred to in subsection 2 the restraining barrier shall meet all the requirements specified in paragraphs 7 a b d e and f as they apply to a seat and the restraining barrier deflection shall not interfere with normal door operation 11 When any contactable surface of a school bus within the head protection zones is impacted from any direction by a head form test device as specified in the test methods referred to in subsection 2 a at 6 7 m s 22 feet per second i the axial acceleration at the centre of gravity of the head form test device shall be such that the expression h a r adt lt t th shall not exceed 1 000 where a is the axial acceleration expressed as a multiple of g the acceleration due to gravity and t and t are any two points in time during the impact and ii the energy necessary to defle
200. installed under section 208 a ifa Type 1 seat belt assembly has been installed seat belt anchorages for a pelvic restraint or b if a Type 2 seat belt assembly has been installed seat belt anchorages for a combination pelvic and upper torso restraint 2 Only the strength test requirements set out in subsections 7 to 10 apply to enclosed motorcycles 2 1 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 7 Anchorage Positioning Requirements 3 A seat belt anchorage for the pelvic portion of a seat belt assembly shall be located at least 165 mm laterally from the other seat belt anchorage of that seat belt as measured between the vertical centrelines of the bolt holes or in designs using another means of attachment to the vehicle structure the centroids of such means 4 In the case of a seat belt assembly in which a the seat belt passes outside the seat or between the seat cushions without bearing on the seat structure as http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 74 de 131 illustrated in Figure 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J383 June 1995 a line from i in the case of a seat that has no travel the seating reference point ii in the case of a seat with a travel of not more than 70 mm where the travel is intended for use by an occupant the H point with the seat in its rearmost position within that range of travel or iii in the case of a seat with a travel of more than 70 mm a
201. int H V of each headlamp tested in accordance with section S10 of TSD 108 are added together 51 Where a daytime running lamp is optically combined with a headlamp that is activated in its concealed position the daytime running lamp shall conform to subsection 47 48 or 50 52 A daytime running lamp may be optically combined with a front fog lamp that conforms to SAE Standard J583 Front Fog Lamps June 1993 or to sections 3 4 2 4 3 5 and 6 of ECE Regulation No 19 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Front Fog Lamps Revision 3 2 March 1993 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 43 de 131 53 Despite subsections 45 to 52 a vehicle may be equipped with a daytime running light system that conforms to Canadian Standards Association Standard CAN CSA D603 88 Daytime Running Light Systems April 1988 other than a Type 4 and Type 5 system reduced voltage upper beam headlamps as indicated in Table 1 of the Standard if a the daytime running light system components are installed in accordance with the instructions referred to in section 8 2 of the Standard and b where the vehicle is equipped with gaseous discharge lower beam headlamps only a Type 1 system normal voltage lower beam headlamp or a Type 6 or Type 7 system separate lamps other than headlamps as indicated in Table 1 of the Standard is used Switching 54 Subject to subs
202. int system Repealed SOR 93 5 s 1 pelvic restraint means a seat belt assembly or portion thereof intended to restrain movement of the pelvis ceinture sous abdominale http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 10 de 131 permanently attached hose end fitting Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 plant of manufacture means the plant at which the manufacturer affixes the vehicle identification number usine de construction pole trailer means a vehicle designed to be drawn behind another vehicle by means of a reach or pole or by being boomed or otherwise secured to the towing vehicle for the purpose of transporting poles pipes structural members or other long or irregularly shaped loads capable generally of sustaining themselves as beams between the supporting connections remorque pour charges longues power assisted bicycle means a vehicle that a has steering handlebars and is equipped with pedals b is designed to travel on not more than three wheels in contact with the ground c is capable of being propelled by muscular power d has one or more electric motors that have singly or in combination the following characteristics i it has a total continuous power output rating measured at the shaft of each motor of 500 W or less ii if it is engaged by the use of muscular power power assistance immediately ceases when the muscular power ceases iii if it is en
203. ion and c the seat back adjusted to the manufacturer s nominal design riding position 14 When the seat is placed in any position the seat back is placed in the manufacturer s nominal design riding http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 69 de 131 position and any adjustable seat belt anchorage is placed in the manufacturer s nominal design position for a 50th percentile adult male occupant every pelvic restraint shall a at the driver s designated seating position be adjustable to fit any occupant whose dimensions range from those of a 5th percentile adult female to those of a 95th percentile adult male and b at all of the other designated seating positions be adjustable to fit any occupant whose dimensions range from those of a 50th percentile six year old child to those of a 95th percentile adult male 15 When the seat is placed in any position the seat back is placed in the manufacturer s nominal design riding position and any adjustable seat belt anchorage is placed in the manufacturer s nominal design position for a 50th percentile adult male occupant every upper torso restraint shall be adjustable to fit any occupant whose dimensions range from those of a 5th percentile adult female to those of a 95th percentile adult male Warning Systems 16 A vehicle that has a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less other than a school bus shall be equipped with a a tell tale that em
204. is at least 280 mm 11 inches outward from the longitudinal centreline of the motorcycle a a rearview mirror with not less than 80 cm 12 5 square inches of reflective surface area or b a convex rearview mirror with not less than 64 5 cm 10 square inches of reflective surface area and an average radius of curvature that is not less than 510 mm 20 inches and not greater than 1 800 mm 71 5 inches School Buses General 14 For the purposes of subsections 16 to 25 a driver s eye position shall be represented by the left and right eye points as defined in SAE Recommended Practice J1050 Describing and Measuring the Driver s Field of View August 1994 and shall be at any place within the area defined by a 95th percentile eyellipse in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J941 Motor Vehicle Drivers Eye Locations June 1997 with the following adaptations a a 50 50 male to female ratio must be used for the male female mix and b heel point referred to in that Recommended Practice and in other documents referenced in that Recommended Practice means the accelerator heel point AHP as defined in section 3 16 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions February 2001 and the position of the heel point is that determined by the manufacturer http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 51 de 131 c Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 2 15 For the pu
205. istance to a uniform test load of 700 000 N or less other than a hydraulic guard or one installed on a tanker trailer absorb by plastic deformation at least 20 000 J of energy within the first 125 mm of deflection and c have a ground clearance not exceeding 560 mm measured at each support to which the horizontal member is attached as shown in Figure 3 after completion of the energy absorption test or if that test is not required after completion of the uniform load test 11 In the case of a rear impact guard that is symmetrical about the longitudinal vertical plane passing through the centre of the horizontal member one half of the guard may be tested in accordance with subsection 12 if it is completely severed from the portion of the guard not being tested 12 When one half of a rear impact guard is tested it shall a by deflecting no more than 125 mm demonstrate resistance to a test load of at least 175 000 N which shall be applied i uniformly across the tested portion of the horizontal member by a uniform load application structure centred on that portion as shown in Figure 2 of Test Method 223 Rear Impact Guard December 2003 or ii by a single point load at one of the P3 test locations on the tested portion of the horizontal member as shown in Figure 2 b in the case of a tested portion of a horizontal member that demonstrates resistance to a test load of 350 000 N or less other than a hydraulic guard or o
206. itions that are located to the rear of the first row of designated seating positions in a multi purpose passenger vehicle that has less than five designated seating positions d for each of any three forward facing designated seating positions that are located to the rear of the first row of designated seating positions in a multi purpose passenger vehicle that has five or more designated seating positions e for each of any two forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those of a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 24 or fewer designated passenger seating positions f for each of any four forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those in a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 25 or more but 65 or fewer designated passenger seating positions g for each of any eight forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver or those in a bench seat that contains an adjacent seat in relation to the emergency exit in a school bus that has 66 or more designated passenger seating positions and h for each of any two forward facing designated seating positions other than that of the driver in a bus other than a school bus 3 1 A user ready tether anchorage shall be available for use at all times except when the seating p
207. its a continuous or flashing warning light that is visible to the driver seated in the normal driving position and a warning system that simultaneously emits a continuous or intermittent audible warning signal for a period of 4 to 8 seconds or b a tell tale that emits for not less than 60 seconds a continuous or flashing warning light that is visible to the driver seated in the normal driving position and a warning system that emits a continuous or intermittent audible warning signal for a period of 4 to 8 seconds 17 The tell tale referred to in subsection 16 shall be activated when a the ignition switch of the vehicle is moved to the on or start position or b the ignition switch of the vehicle is moved to the on or start position and i the seat belt latch mechanism of the pelvic restraint located at the driver s designated seating position is not fastened or ii the pelvic restraint located at the driver s designated seating position is extended less than 100 mm from the normal stowed position 18 The warning system referred to in subsection 16 shall be activated when the ignition switch of the vehicle is moved to the on or start position and a the seat belt latch mechanism of the pelvic restraint located at the driver s designated seating position is not fastened or b the pelvic restraint located at the driver s designated seating position is extended less than 100 mm from the
208. ivate an air bag installed at the right front outboard designated seating position if a the vehicle has no forward facing designated seating position to the rear of the front designated seating positions or b the distance between the rearward surface of the front seat back and forward surface of the rear seat back is less than 720 mm as measured in accordance with Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 26 If a vehicle is equipped at a designated seating position with an air bag the vehicle shall if scheduled maintenance or replacement of the air bag is required have a label permanently affixed within the occupant compartment of the vehicle stating in letters of not less than 6 points in height in both official languages the manufacturer s recommended maintenance or replacement schedule by a month and year b vehicle distance travelled or c specified time intervals measured from the month and year stated on the compliance label or information label applied to the vehicle in accordance with these Regulations 27 Where a vehicle is equipped at a designated seating position with an air bag the vehicle shall have a label or labels permanently affixed to the sun visor at that position or in a readily visible area adjacent to the sun visor in letters of not less than 6 points in height stating in both official languages the following warnings a if that position is a right front
209. iver accommodation includes a driver s seat that is designed to be removable or that has extended adjustment capability to allow a person to transfer from a wheelchair to the driver s seat place du conducteur particuli re speed attainable in 1 6 km 1 mile means the speed attainable by accelerating at maximum rate from a standing start for 1 6 km on a level surface vitesse 1 6 km 1 mille speed attainable in 3 2 km 2 miles means the speed attainable by accelerating at maximum rate from a standing start for 3 2 km on a level surface vitesse 3 2 km 2 milles spike stop means a stop resulting from the application of 889 6 N 200 pounds of force on the service brake control in 0 08 second arr t d urgence split service brake system means a brake system consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control designed so that a single failure in any subsystem such as a leakage type failure of a pressure component of a hydraulic subsystem except for the structural failure of a housing that is common to two or more subsystems or an electrical failure in an electrical subsystem does not impair the operation of any other subsystem syst me de frein de service partag spoke wheel means a rotating member that provides for mounting and support of demountable rims roue rayons steering column means the structural housing that surrounds a steering shaft colonne de direction steering control system
210. justment from within the occupant compartment of the vehicle 3 The average reflectance of a mirror referred to in this section shall be determined in accordance with SAE Standard J964 Test Procedure for Determining Reflectivity of Rear View Mirrors June 1992 4 A mirror referred to in this section that is a single reflectance mirror shall have a reflectance level of at least 35 per cent 5 A mirror referred to in this section that is a multiple reflectance mirror shall have a daytime reflectance level of at least 35 per cent and a night time reflectance level of at least 4 per cent In the event of electrical failure the mirror shall be adjustable either manually or automatically to a reflectance level of at least 35 per cent 6 An outside rearview mirror referred to in paragraph 7 b or subsection 26 or 27 that is installed on the side of the vehicle opposite the driver s side may be convex if a its reflective surface area is equal to or greater than the reflective surface area that a unit magnification mirror must have in accordance with that paragraph or subsection http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 50 de 131 b its average radius of curvature is not less than 890 mm 35 inches and not greater than 1 800 mm 71 5 inches and c the radius of curvature at any point does not deviate by more than 12 5 per cent from the average of any five radius of curvature
211. k tires the load range identification symbol shall appear on the compliance label required by section 6 of these Regulations or on the tire information label Compliance 6 Compliance with subsection 3 is only required after August 31 2009 Expiry Date 7 This section expires on August 1 2013 SOR 79 340 s 3 SOR 79 696 ss 1 2 SOR 87 451 s 1 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 95 147 s 10 SOR 2002 55 ss 15 21 SOR 2003 272 s 17 SOR 2005 342 s 3 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2008 258 s 9 AIR BRAKE SYSTEMS STANDARD 121 121 1 Every motor vehicle that is equipped with an air brake system and to which Technical Standards Document No 121 Air Brake Systems TSD 121 applies shall conform to the requirements of TSD 121 as amended from time to time 2 When a truck or bus is equipped with a front brake pressure limiting valve that valve shall be automatic and shall operate while the service brakes are applied 3 Every antilock brake system malfunction indicator referred to in S5 1 6 2 of TSD 121 shall display the corresponding symbol shown for this indicator in Table Il to section 101 of this Schedule and all words accompanying the symbols shall be displayed in both official languages 4 Despite S5 2 3 3 a of TSD 121 in addition to conforming to the requirements of S5 2 3 2 of TSD 121 each trailer and each trailer converter dolly manufactured before March 1 2010 shall be equipped with an external antilock brake s
212. l ration actionn par le conducteur ECE means the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe Inland Transport Committee CEE effective projected luminous lens area Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 emergency brake means a mechanism designed to stop a vehicle after a failure of the service brake system frein de secours emergency locking retractor means a retractor incorporating adjustment hardware that has a locking mechanism that is activated by vehicle acceleration webbing movement in relation to the vehicle or other automatic action during an emergency and is capable when locked of withstanding restraint forces r tracteur a blocage d urgence emergency vehicle means any fire fighting vehicle ambulance police vehicle or other vehicle that is used for the purpose of an emergency v hicule de secours enclosed motorcycle means a motorcycle that a has steering handlebars that are completely constrained from rotating in relation to the axle of only one wheel in contact with the ground b is designed to travel on two wheels in contact with the ground c has a minimum seat height when the vehicle is unladen of 650 mm and d has a structure partially or fully enclosing the driver and passenger that is an integral part of the vehicle chassis motocyclette a habitacle ferm http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 5 de 131 engine coolant temperature i
213. ld that is used to cover an engine luggage storage or battery compartment 2 Each hood with which a vehicle is equipped shall be provided with a hood latch system 3 A front opening hood that in any position partially or completely obstructs a driver s forward view through the windshield of the vehicle shall be provided with a second latching position on the hood latch system or with a second hood latch system SOR 79 306 s 4 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 2000 182 s 6 THEFT PROTECTION AND ROLLAWAY PREVENTION STANDARD 114 114 1 With the exception of a walk in van every passenger car every three wheeled vehicle and every multi purpose passenger vehicle and truck with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 114 Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention TSD 114 as amended from time to time 2 The term self mobility in TSD 114 means movement of a vehicle under its own power http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 55 de 131 3 Subsection 1 expires on January 1 2010 Immobilization System 4 With the exception of a walk in van and an emergency vehicle every passenger car every three wheeled vehicle and every multi purpose passenger vehicle and truck with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less shall be equipped with an immobilization system that meets one of the following sets of requirements as modified by subsection
214. ll a complete the incomplete vehicle in such a manner that the completed vehicle conforms to the standards prescribed for a completed vehicle of that class as of the date chosen by the final stage manufacturer and b apply to the completed vehicle a compliance label in accordance with section 6 except that i the date of manufacture referred to in paragraph 6 1 b is the date of manufacture chosen by the final stage manufacturer and ii subject to subsection 2 the GVWR and GAWRs shall be those set out on the label applied by the previous manufacturer 2 If a final stage manufacturer increases the GVWR or the GAWRs above those referred to in paragraphs 6 1 1 d and e and subsection 6 4 4 or new ratings have been displayed on an intermediate manufacturer s information label the final stage manufacturer shall ensure that the new ratings are displayed on the compliance label for the completed vehicle and a are increased in accordance with the written recommendations of the incomplete vehicle manufacturer or if applicable of another previous manufacturer or b are within the load carrying capacity of the vehicle s components when the vehicle is loaded for its intended use as a completed vehicle SOR 2002 55 s 5 7 All the labels applied to a vehicle under sections 6 6 2 6 4 and 6 6 shall a be permanently attached to the vehicle b be resistant to or protected against any weather condition to which the label
215. ly that is located outboard of that front outboard designated seating position 35 The webbing of an upper torso restraint and pelvic restraint installed in a vehicle at a front outboard designated seating position where tested in accordance with this section and under the conditions set out in section 5 of Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 shall automatically retract to a stowed position a in the case of a vehicle with no doors i where the seat belt assembly has no tension relieving device when the latch plate is released and http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 72 de 131 ii where the seat belt assembly has a tension relieving device when the tension relieving device is deactivated and b in any other case when the latch plate is released and the adjacent vehicle door is in the open or closed position 36 The stowed position of a seat belt assembly shall in the case of a vehicle with doors prevent any part of the seat belt assembly from being pinched when the adjacent vehicle door is closed 37 Where a seat belt assembly has seat belt webbing that passes through the seat cushion or between the seat cushion and the seat back a one of the following parts namely the latch plate the buckle or the webbing shall be maintained on top of or above the seat cushion under normal conditions and b the remaining two se
216. m vertically above and 175 mm horizontally back from H point 5 W Point W reference point 50 mm vertically below and 50 mm horizontally back from R Point Figure 7 Three dimensional Schematic View of User ready Tether Anchorage Location Figures 8 to 11 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 8 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 83 de 131 Figure 12 Three dimensional Schematic View of the Static Force Application Test Device Tether attachment point 513 0 Lo ra Two 1 2 inch diameter holes H in line and drill through _ X Point Axis 8 550 0 ts ol E Pa cs 1 500 A 76 2 diameter 50 8 diameter 3 au 4 drili through hole drill through hole typi Vehicle seat belt E 200 0 wre g path hole as 7 503 0 ell http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 84 de 131 Notes 1 Material 6061 T6 910 Aluminum 2 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 3 Drawing not to scale 4 Break all outside corners Figure 13 Side View Static Force Application Test Device nl Ds 140 0 12 7 radius Notes 1 Material 6061 T6 910 Aluminum 2 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 3 Drawing not to scale 4 Break all outside corners and lightning hole edges approximately 1 5 mm 5 Break edges of vehicle seat belt path holes at least 44 mm 6 B approxi
217. manufacturer manufactures less than 1 000 vehicles of a prescribed class annually b the fourth to eighth characters inclusive shall uniquely identify the decipherable information for the vehicle as set out in Column Il of Table except that i the seventh character shall be alphabetic for a multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car three wheeled vehicle or truck having a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less ii subject to subparagraph i the characters and their positioning may be determined by the manufacturer and iii in the case of an incomplete vehicle to be completed as a trailer the decipherable information required for an incomplete vehicle in column Il of Table shall be that for a trailer c the ninth character shall be the check digit determined in accordance with subsections 7 and 8 after all other characters have been determined by the manufacturer d the tenth character shall be the code that corresponds to the vehicle model year as set out in Table Il e the eleventh character shall identify the plant of manufacture of the vehicle f the twelfth to seventeenth characters shall be sequentially assigned by the manufacturer during the manufacturing process if the manufacturer manufactures 1 000 or more vehicles of a prescribed class annually http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 57 de 131 g the fifteenth to seventeenth characters shall be sequentially
218. mately 0 8 mm Figure 14 Plan View Static Force Application Test Device http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 85 de 131 Notes 1 2 3 4 5 Material 6061 T6 910 Aluminum Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated Drawing not to scale B approximately 0 8 mm C approximately 3 2 mm Figure 15 Front View Static Force Application Test Device http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 86 de 131 Ends must be fiat Notes 1 2 6 7 Material Steel Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated Drawing not to scale Break all outside corners approximately 1 5 mm Surfaces and edges are not to be machined unless otherwise specified for tolerance Saw cut or stock size material whenever possible Construction to be securely welded Figure 16 Cross Bar Static Force Application Test Device Figures 17 and 18 Repealed SOR 2002 205 s 3 Figure 19 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 8 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 87 de 131 Legend d centre to centre distance between the bars of a lower universal anchorage system for a given seating position nominal distance of 280 mm D distance between vertical longitudinal planes located midway between the bars of a lower universal anc
219. mbole de mauvais fonctionnement du syst me de freinage 7 ll est permis d utiliser un m me t moin pour le symbole de la pression d huile du moteur et le symbole de la temp rature du liquide de refroidissement 8 L unit de mesure si elle est indiqu e est le km Dans le cas d un affichage lectronique de l odom tre pouvant passer de km en mi ou de mi en km ind pendamment de I unit de mesure affich e par le compteur de vitesse l unit doit tre indiqu e en milles ou kilom tres selon le cas SOR 78 257 s 2 SOR 86 976 s 2 SOR 93 31 s 3 SOR 94 374 s 5 SOR 95 147 s 7 SOR 95 164 s 3 SOR 97 200 s 3 SOR 97 421 ss 18 E 19 F 20 F SOR 2003 272 s 7 SOR 2007 180 s 22 F SOR 2008 258 s 7 TRANSMISSION CONTROL FUNCTIONS STANDARD 102 SOR 97 421 S 3 102 1 Any automatic transmission fitted on a vehicle shall have a its control positions in such a sequence that i movement between any forward and reverse drive position may be made only through a neutral position ii in the case of a steering column mounted control movement from the neutral position to any forward drive position may be made in a clockwise direction only and iii the park position if included in the sequence is located at the end of the sequence adjacent to the reverse drive position and b one forward drive position that in vehicles having more than one forward transmission
220. mm c are parallel with collinear centroidal longitudinal axes and are spaced laterally so that they permit the lower connectors on a child restraint fixture shown in Figures 2 to 4 to be attached to them over the entire length of the lower connectors d are an integral and permanent part of a vehicle seat or seat anchorage or the structure of the vehicle such that they can be removed only with the use of tools e are rigidly attached to a vehicle seat or seat anchorage or the structure of the vehicle so that they will not deform more than 5 mm when subjected to a force of 100 N in any direction with the vehicle seat adjusted in the vehicle to its full rearward and full downward position and the seat back adjusted in the nominal design riding position and f permit a checking device to be attached to them over the entire width of the checking device with a gap of less than 1 mm between the surface of the bars and line M shown in Figure 5 4 Subject to subsections 7 and 8 a lower universal anchorage system shall be installed a in one forward facing designated seating position other than that of the driver in a vehicle that has only one row of forward facing designated seating positions b in two forward facing designated seating positions in the second row of seating positions in a passenger car three wheeled vehicle or truck c in two forward facing designated seating positions that are located to the rear of the
221. n 19 and b shall not when tested in accordance with Test Method 213 4 Built In Child Restraint Systems and Built In Booster Cushions January 2007 impose on the child any loads that result from the mass of the system or from the mass of any part of the vehicle into which the child restraint system is built 16 Every built in child restraint system shall when the anthropometric test device is positioned in accordance with Test Method 213 4 Built In Child Restraint Systems and Built In Booster Cushions January 2007 provide a upper torso restraint in the form of i belts passing over each shoulder of the anthropometric test device ii a fixed or movable surface that complies with subsection 10 or iii in the case of a rear facing child restraint system a single diagonal belt passing over one shoulder or belts passing over each shoulder or the anthropometric test device b lower torso restraint in the form of i a lap belt assembly making an angle between 45 and 90 with the built in child restrain system seating surface at the lap belt attachment points or ii a fixed or movable surface that complies with subsection 10 and c if a front facing built in child restraint system crotch restraint in the form of i a crotch belt connectable to the lap belt or other device used to restrain the lower torso or ii a fixed or movable surface that complies with subsection 10 17 Every built in child res
222. n Lamps HS Lamps as amended from time to time or iv ECE Regulation No 113 Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicle Headlamps Emitting a Symmetrical Passing Beam or a Driving Beam or Both and Equipped with Filament Lamps as amended from time to time and c conform to subsections 108 12 29 and if applicable 30 3 As an alternative to the requirements of the ECE Regulations referred to in this section headlamps fitted on a http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 45 de 131 vehicle may emit white light as specified in SAE Standard J578 Color Specification May 1988 4 For the purposes of this section the following requirements of the ECE Regulations referred to in subsections 1 and 2 do not apply a any requirements respecting the approval process b any requirements respecting the marking of approved headlamps and c any requirements respecting i the conformity of headlamp production to the type approved ii the penalties for non conformity of production and iii the modification of a headlamp type and extension of approval 5 The total intensity of the upper beams of the headlamps of a vehicle equipped pursuant to this section shall not exceed 225 000 cd at any point in the beam pattern when measured at 12 V 6 Except for headlamps with plastic lenses wipers may be fitted to the headlamps of a vehicle equipped pursuan
223. n a vehicle the English and French versions of the owner s manual shall include the statement on the label 22 Where a vehicle is tested in accordance with subsection 23 during the test a each anthropomorphic test device shall be completely contained within the outer surface of the vehicle occupant compartment b the resultant acceleration at the centre of gravity of the head of each anthropomorphic test device i shall not exceed 80 g when acting from in front of the test device s coronal plane except where it is established http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 70 de 131 that the maximum resultant acceleration above 80 g is caused by another part of the anthropomorphic test device striking its head or ii if an air bag is installed at the designated seating position may be such that the value of the expression 2 5 1 m fadt 6 8 6 e does not exceed 700 where a is the resultant acceleration at the centre of gravity of the head expressed as a multiple of g g is the acceleration due to gravity and t and t are any two points in time during the impact expressed in seconds that are separated by an interval of not more than 15 ms c compression deflection of the sternum relative to the spine of the upper thorax of each anthropomorphic test device i shall not exceed 50 mm or ii in the case of a vehicle with a GVWR greater than 2 722 kg shall not exc
224. n of the seat is applied through the centre of gravity of that portion of the seat and c subjected to an acceleration of 20 g in the longitudinal direction opposite to that in which the seat folds 6 Seats not intended for occupancy while the vehicle is in motion shall bear a conspicuous label that so states in English and in French OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN FRONTAL IMPACT STANDARD 208 Seat Belt Installation Requirements 208 1 Subject to subsections 2 1 and 8 to 10 every vehicle shall be equipped at each front outboard designated seating position with a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that a has a non detachable upper torso restraint and b is capable of adjustment by means of an emergency locking retractor 2 Subject to subsections 3 and 4 every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle and every truck bus or multi purpose passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less other than a school bus or motor home shall be equipped at each forward facing rear outboard designated seating position with a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 68 de 131 a has a non detachable upper torso restraint and b is capable of adjustment by means of an emergency locking retractor 2 1 Every enclosed motorcycle shall be equipped at each designated seating position with a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that a has a non
225. nclude in the submission to the Minister a a description of the new features b a copy of the research development and testing documentation establishing the innovative nature of the new features c an analysis of how the level of performance of the new features is equivalent to or superior to the level of performance established by the prescribed standards including i a detailed description of how a vehicle equipped with the new features would if exempted differ from one that conforms to the prescribed standards and ii the results of tests conducted on the new features that demonstrate a level of performance that is equivalent to or superior to that required by the prescribed standards d evidence that an exemption would facilitate the development or the field evaluation of the vehicle and e a statement as to whether the manufacturer intends at the end of the exemption period i to conform to the prescribed standards ii to apply for a further exemption or iii to request that the prescribed standards be amended to incorporate the new features 4 Where the basis of an application for exemption is the development of new kinds of vehicles vehicle systems or components the applicant shall include in the submission to the Minister a a copy of the research development and testing documentation establishing that an exemption would not substantially diminish the safe performance of the vehicle including i
226. nd S7 3 8 a of TSD 108 do not apply to the headlamps on a bus truck multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car or three wheeled vehicle 27 Despite section S7 3 7 e 8 of TSD 108 the figures to which a deflectometer referred to in section 4 5 of SAE Standard J580 Sealed Beam Headlamp Assembly December 1986 shall be designed to conform are those specified in a standard or recommended practice issued by the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE or provided by the vehicle manufacturer to the Minister at the Minister s request 28 Despite section S7 3 8 c 2 of TSD 108 the figures to which the special adapter and the deflectometer shall be designed to conform are those specified in a standard or recommended practice issued by the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE or provided by the vehicle manufacturer to the Minister at the Minister s request 29 The aiming mechanism of every headlamp assembly and front fog lamp assembly shall conform to section 5 13 5 of SAE Recommended Practice J1383 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps June 1990 30 Headlamp assemblies and front fog lamp assemblies incorporating retaining rings shall conform to section 5 23 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J1383 Performance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps June 1990 31 In addition to the requirements of section S7 3 of TSD 108 sealed beam headlamps with plastic lenses or reflectors shall conform to sections S7 4 g and h of
227. ndard and c adjustable seats are placed in the adjustment position that is midway between the forward most and rearmost positions and if separately adjustable in a vertical direction shall be at the lowest position but if an adjustment position does not exist midway between the forward most and rearmost positions the closest adjustment position to the rear of the midpoint shall be used 5 For a motor tricycle or three wheeled vehicle with one wheel at the front and two wheels at the rear the horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis shown in Figure 2 shall be determined using the equation d L sin arctan t 2W where d is the horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis L is the longitudinal distance between the centre of mass and the centre of the front axle t is the width of the wheel track of the rear axle and W is the wheelbase 6 For a motor tricycle or three wheeled vehicle with two wheels at the front and one wheel at the rear the horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis shown in Figure 2 shall be determined using the equation d W L sin arctan t 2W where d isthe horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis W is the wheelbase L is the longitudinal distance between the centre of mass and the centre of the front axle and t is the width of the wheel track of the front axle 7 Motor tricycle
228. ndicator means a device that presents information concerning the temperature of the coolant indicateur de temp rature du liquide de refroidissement engine coolant temperature tell tale means a signal that when alight indicates that the temperature of the engine coolant is above the normal engine running temperature prescribed by the manufacturer t moin de temp rature du liquide de refroidissement engine type means a power source distinguished by the fuel utilized number of cylinders displacement net brake horsepower or other characteristics type de moteur ERBP Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 final stage manufacturer means a company that performs the manufacturing operations on an incomplete vehicle that turn the incomplete vehicle into a completed vehicle fabricant l tape finale fixed collision barrier means a device that a consists of i a structure with a flat vertical unyielding impact surface that is of a size sufficient to ensure that no portion of a vehicle striking the surface projects or passes beyond the surface and ii a horizontal approach surface that does not impede vehicle motion during impact and that is of a size sufficient to ensure that a vehicle will be able to attain a stable attitude during its approach to the impact surface and b does not absorb any significant portion of the kinetic energy of a vehicle striking the impact surface barri re fixe pour essais de collision
229. ne installed on a tanker trailer absorb by plastic deformation at least 10 000 J of energy within the first 125 mm of deflection and c have a ground clearance not exceeding 560 mm measured at each support to which the horizontal member is attached as shown in Figure 3 after completion of the energy absorption test or if that test is not required after completion of the uniform load test Trailer rear extremity Rear impact guard horizontal member 305mm maximum Figure 1 Side View of Trailer Note 1 Drawing not to scale Longitudina Side Side Support lt vertical plane i 50 mm http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 119 de 131 Note 1 Drawing not to scale Figure 2 Rear View of Trailer SIDE VIEW Trailer rear extremity or rigid test fixture Position of rear impact guard horizontal member after load test is complete Su for horizontal P an a Force Post test ound clearance Position of rear impact guard horizontal member at start of load test Note 1 Drawing not to scale Figure 3 Load Application Test SOR 2004 195 s 2 SOR 2008 104 s 19 PART IV FUEL SYSTEM INTEGRITY STANDARD 301 301 1 Every passenger car and every multi purpose passenger vehicle truck and bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less that is equipped with a fuel system that uses a fuel with a boiling point of 0 C or hig
230. ng from capillary action coulement de carburant fuel system means all components used to store fuel or supply fuel to a vehicle engine circuit d alimentation en carburant full trailer for the purposes of Technical Standards Document No 121 Air Brake Systems means a trailer except a pole trailer that is equipped with two or more axles that support the entire weight of the trailer and its load remorque complete gasoline Repealed SOR 2002 187 s 1 glazing material manufacturer means a person engaged in the business of fabricating laminating or tempering glazing material fabricant de vitrages grade Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 gross axle weight rating or GAWR means the value specified by the vehicle manufacturer as the load carrying capacity of a single axle system as measured at the tire ground interfaces poids nominal brut sur l essieu orPNBE gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR means the value specified by the vehicle manufacturer as the loaded weight of a single vehicle poids nominal brut du v hicule orPNBV H point means the mechanically hinged hip point of a manikin that simulates the actual pivot centre of the human torso and thigh described in SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 point H H V axis means the characteristic axis of the light pattern of a lamp passing through the centre of the light source used
231. ng positions shall not separate completely from the vehicle seat or seat anchorage or the structure of the vehicle when tested http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 89 de 131 a subject to subsection 15 by pulling with a force of 15 000 N which force is i applied by means of a test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 that is installed using both the associated user ready tether anchorage and the lower universal anchorage system as a child restraint system would be installed in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer s instructions ii applied in a forward direction parallel to the vehicle s vertical longitudinal plane through the X point on the test device starting with a pre load force of 500 N iii applied initially along a line above the horizontal line at an angle of 10 5 to it iv attained within 30 seconds at any onset force rate of not more than 135 000 N s and v maintained at a level of 15 000 N for a minimum of one second and b by pulling with a force of 5 000 N which force is i applied by means of a test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 that is installed as a child restraint system would be installed in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer s instructions using both the user ready tether anchorage and the lower universal anchorage system or at the manufacturer s option using only the lower universal anchorage system ii applied along a ver
232. ng system for the purpose of seating in an elevated position a person who weighs at least 18 kg 40 pounds in order to adapt an adult seat belt assembly of the motor vehicle to the person coussin d appoint int gr built in child restraint system means a device except a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly that is designed to restrain a child and that is an integral part of a vehicle seating system ensemble int gr de retenue d enfant built in dual purpose restraint system means a device that combines the function of a built in child restraint system and a built in booster cushion ensemble int gr de retenue a double usage bus means a vehicle having a designated seating capacity of more than 10 but does not include a trailer or a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes autobus bus trailer means a vehicle having a designated seating capacity of more than 10 and designed primarily to be drawn behind another vehicle remorque autobus C dolly means a trailer converter dolly that is equipped with a single axle that is self steering and with a coupling that is so designed that when the trailer converter dolly is coupled to a towing trailer the trailer converter dolly cannot pivot horizontally with respect to the towing trailer chariot de conversion de type C cable reel trailer means a vehicle designed to be drawn behind another vehicle for the exclusive purpose of carrying a drum or reel of cable chariot
233. nister prior to importation of the vehicle or b in the case of a company whose world production of vehicles is 2 500 or more a year may be filed with the Minister quarterly 4 For the purposes of paragraph 5 1 b of the Act any company that imports 2 500 vehicles or more a year into Canada may provide the information referred to in subsection 1 in another form and manner that is satisfactory to the Minister 5 Any company importing a vehicle into Canada pursuant to subsection 5 3 of the Act shall at the nearest customs office that is open for business make a declaration signed by that person or that person s duly authorized representative setting out a the name of the company importing the vehicle b the name of the company that completed the main assembly of the vehicle c the name of the company that will be completing the vehicle d the class make model and vehicle identification number of the vehicle e the date the vehicle is presented for importation f a statement from the company that completed the main assembly of the vehicle that the vehicle when completed in accordance with the provided instructions will conform to the applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations at the time the main assembly of the vehicle was completed and g a statement that the vehicle will be completed in accordance with the provided instructions 6 Any person importing a vehicle imported temporarily into Cana
234. nnex 3 to ECE Regulation No 51 Uniform Provisions concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicles Having at Least Four Wheels with regard to Their Noise Emissions dated March 11 1996 excluding the requirements of paragraph 3 2 of that Annex the vehicle conforms to section 6 of that Regulation or b where tested in accordance with i section 3 of Test Method 1106 Noise Emission Tests August 2005 the exterior sound level does not exceed 83 dBA when a value of 2 dBA is subtracted from the highest average sound level recorded during the test in the case of a bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib ii SAE Recommended Practice J986 Sound Level for Passenger Cars and Light Trucks August 1994 or SAE Standard J1470 Measurement of Noise Emitted by Accelerating Highway Vehicles March 1992 the exterior sound level does not exceed 83 dBA when a value of 2 dBA is subtracted from the highest average sound level recorded during the test in the case of a heavy duty vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib or less and iii SAE Recommended Practice J986 Sound Level for Passenger Cars and Light Trucks August 1994 or SAE Standard J1470 Measurement of Noise Emitted by Accelerating Highway Vehicles March 1992 the exterior sound level does not exceed 80 dBA when a value of 2 dBA is subtracted from the highest average sound level recorded during the test in the case of a light duty vehicle SOR 2005 342 s 6 3 Every motorc
235. ns the unique Design H Point as defined in section 3 11 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions February 2001 that a establishes the rearmost normal design driving or riding position of each designated seating position taking into account all modes of adjustment horizontal vertical and tilt in a vehicle b has X Y and Z coordinates as defined in section 3 3 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions February 2001 established relative to the designed vehicle structure c simulates the position of the pivot centre of the human torso and thigh and d is the reference point employed to position the H Point template with the 95th percentile leg as described in section 4 1 of SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 or if that template cannot be positioned the reference point when the seat is in its rearmost adjustment position point de r f rence de position assise seat orientation reference line SORL means the horizontal line through point Z as illustrated in Figure 1 of sections 213 213 1 and 213 3 ligne rep re d orientation du si ge LROS semi trailer means a trailer constructed in such a manner that a substantial part of its weight rests upon or is carried by another vehicle by means of a fifth wheel or similar coupling but does not include a pole trailer or any trailer designed to be drawn behind a pa
236. nt across the full width of the horizontal member However rounded corners may curve upward within 255 mm of the longitudinal vertical planes that are tangent to the side extremities 8 At any height above the ground clearance the rearmost surface of the horizontal member shall be located as close as practicable to a transverse vertical plane tangent to the rear extremity of the trailer and no more than 305 mm forward of that plane as shown in Figure 1 However the horizontal member may extend rearward of the plane TEST REQUIREMENTS 9 Every rear impact guard shall demonstrate resistance to the following forces applied at the P1 and P2 test locations shown in Figure 2 by deflecting no more than 125 mm a 50 000 N at test location P1 on either the left or the right side of the guard if it is symmetrical but both sides must be independently tested if the guard is not symmetrical and b 50 000 N at test location P2 10 Subject to subsection 11 every rear impact guard shall a by deflecting no more than 125 mm demonstrate resistance to a uniform test load of at least 350 000 N which shall be applied uniformly across the horizontal member by a uniform load application structure centred on the guard as shown in Figure 2 of Test Method 223 Rear Impact Guard December 2003 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 118 de 131 b in the case of a guard that demonstrates res
237. nt but does not include booster cushions or vehicle seat belts ensemble de retenue restraint system for disabled persons Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 restricted use motorcycle means a vehicle excluding a power assisted bicycle a competition vehicle and a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes but including an all terrain vehicle designed primarily for recreational use that http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 11 de 131 a has steering handlebars b is designed to travel on not more than four wheels in contact with the ground c does not have as an integral part of the vehicle a structure to enclose the driver and passenger other than that part of the vehicle forward of the driver s torso and the seat backrest and d bears a label permanently affixed in a conspicuous location stating in both official languages that the vehicle is a restricted use motorcycle or an all terrain vehicle and is not intended for use on public highways motocyclette a usage restreint retractor means a device for storing part or all of the webbing in a seat belt assembly r tracteur rim base Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 rim diameter means the nominal diameter of the bead seat diam tre de jante rim size designation Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 rim type designation Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 rim width Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 rupture Rep
238. nt restraint system secured in a rear seating position SOR 90 588 s 3 SOR 93 5 s 5 SOR 97 447 s 7 SOR 2003 57 ss 1 3 F 4 F SOR 2003 272 s 25 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 14 SOR 2008 72 s 7 USER READY TETHER ANCHORAGES FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEMS STANDARD 210 1 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 75 de 131 Application 210 1 1 Subject to subsection 2 this section applies to every a passenger car b three wheeled vehicle c multi purpose passenger vehicle and truck with a GVWR of 3 856 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2 495 kg or less d school bus and e bus other than a school bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less 2 This section does not apply to a a designated seating position at which a built in child restraint system is provided that is not part of a removable vehicle seat or b a hearse General 3 Subject to subsection 3 3 a user ready tether anchorage shall be installed in a vehicle other than a convertible or an open body type vehicle a for each forward facing designated seating position other than that of the driver in a vehicle that has only one row of forward facing designated seating positions b for each forward facing designated seating position in the second row of seating positions in a passenger car three wheeled vehicle or truck c for all forward facing designated seating pos
239. nt system to the vehicle structure or a seat structure and is designed to accept directly a tether strap hook without requiring any other device to be installed to accept the tether strap hook ancrage d attache pr t utiliser vacuum tubing connector Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 variable brake proportioning system means a system that has one or more proportioning devices that automatically change the brake pressure ratio between any two or more wheels to compensate for changes in wheel loading resulting from static load changes or dynamic weight transfer or from deceleration compensateur de freinage variable proportioning brake system Repealed SOR 97 200 s 1 vehicle Repealed SOR 95 536 s 7 vehicle capacity mass Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 vehicle fuel tank capacity means a the volume of fuel left at the bottom of the tank when the fuel pump of the vehicle can no longer draw fuel from the tank plus b the volume of fuel that can be pumped into the tank through the filler pipe when the vehicle is on a level surface and the volume of fuel referred to in paragraph a is already in the tank http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 14 de 131 except that the volume of fuel referred to in paragraph b does not include any volume of fuel that can be pumped into the fuel tank filler neck or into the space above the fuel tank filler neck capacit du r se
240. ny specific part of the information and data found in the application and f the reasons why the granting of the exemption would be in the public interest and consistent with the objectives of the Act 2 Where the basis of an application for an exemption is substantial financial hardship the applicant shall include in the submission to the Minister a technical and financial information demonstrating in detail why conformity to the standards referred to in paragraph 1 c would create substantial financial hardship including i a list of each of the items that would have to be altered in order to achieve conformity ii the itemized estimated cost of making the alterations referred to in subparagraph i A at the end of one year from the date the application is submitted if the application is for an exemption for one year or more but less than two years http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 25 de 131 B at the end of two years from the date the application is submitted if the application is for an exemption for two years or more but less than three years or C at the end of three years from the date the application is submitted if the application is for an exemption for three years iii the estimated price increase per vehicle to counter the total costs incurred pursuant to subparagraph ii and a statement of the anticipated effect of each such price increase
241. of section 31 7 the word rapidly means less than 5 minutes and the words time consuming mean at least 5 minutes c despite any statement to the contrary in sections 31 10 and 31 11 the immobilization system shall not have any impact on the vehicle s brake system and d for the purposes of section 32 4 1 the expression maximum of 5 minutes is replaced by the expression a maximum of 1 minute 7 The requirements set out in Part IV of ECE Regulation No 116 are modified as follows a the aftermarket type approval and radio emission requirements do not apply b for the purposes of section 8 2 7 the word rapidly means less than 5 minutes and the expression time consuming means at least 5 minutes c despite any statement to the contrary in sections 8 2 10 and 8 2 11 the immobilization system shall not have any impact on the vehicle s brake system and d for the purposes of section 8 3 4 1 the expression maximum of 5 minutes is replaced by the expression a maximum of 1 minute 8 A vehicle equipped with an immobilization system shall be accompanied by the following written information a instructions for operating and maintaining the system and b a warning not to leave in the vehicle a device or a combination that disarms or deactivates the system 9 The information shall be provided in English French or both official languages as requested by the first retail purchase
242. of the symbol may be solid 2 The left and right arrows may be separated if arrows operate independently flashing green lights 3 Hazard warning signal is not required when independently operated turn signal lights flash simultaneously as hazard warning lights 4 Outline may be used alone 5 Red may be red orange Blue may be blue green 6 If a single tell tale is used to indicate more than one brake system condition use the brake system malfunction symbol 7 Combination of the engine oil pressure symbol and the engine coolant temperature symbol in a single tell tale is permitted 8 The unit of measurement if identified is km Where an electronic odometer display can be switched from km to mi or from mi to km independently of the units being displayed by a speedometer the odometer units must be identified in miles or kilometres as appropriate 1 Les parties encadr es du symbole peuvent tre pleines 2 Il est permis de dissocier les fl ches si leur fonctionnement est ind pendant lumi re verte clignotante 3 Des feux d avertissement ne sont pas n cessaires lorsque les clignotants servent galement de feux d avertissement 4 Il est permis d utiliser seulement le contour 5 Il est permis d utiliser le rouge orange au lieu du rouge et le bleu vert au lieu du bleu 6 Si un seul t moin est employ pour indiquer plus d une condition du syst me de freinage employer le sy
243. om the vertical longitudinal planes through the geometric centre of each of the two bars of the lower universal anchorage system installed at the seating position For those designated seating positions that do not have the lower universal anchorage system bars the midpoint of a designated seating position lies in the vertical longitudinal plane that passes through the SgRP of the seating position http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 97 de 131 3 The distance shall be measured between the vertical longitudinal planes passing through the midpoints of adjacent designated seating positions along a line perpendicular to the planes Figure 9 Measurement of Distance Between Adjacent Designated Seating Positions for Use in Simultaneous Testing 13 mm Minimum Notes 1 Drawing not to scale 2 Symbol may be shown in mirror image 3 Colour of the symbol at choice of manufacturer Figure 10 Lower Universal Anchorage System Symbol Vertical Transverse Plane Horizontal Centre Line of Each Bar of the E 54 Val Horizontal Longitudinal Plane Lower Universal Anchorage System Notes 1 Drawing not to scale 2 2 50mmsas100 mm 3 b 100 mm 25 mm Figure 11 Placement of Symbol on the Seat Back and Seat Cushion of a Vehicle http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 98 de 131 me 25 mm minimum Note Dra
244. ompany pursuant to section 3 d the vehicle identification number e in the case of a passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle low speed vehicle three wheeled vehicle truck bus trailer trailer converter dolly or motorcycle i the gross vehicle weight rating expressed in kilograms clearly identified by the words Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Poids nominal brut du v hicule or the abbreviations GVWR and PNBV and ii the gross axle weight rating expressed in kilograms for each axle of the vehicle listed in order from front to rear and clearly identified by the words Gross Axle Weight Ratings and Poids nominal brut sur l essieu or the abbreviations GAWR and PNBE unless the information is set out on the vehicle placard or on the tire inflation pressure label referred to in section S4 3 of Technical Standards Document No 110 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of 4 536 kg or Less or on the tire information label referred to in section S5 3 b of Technical Standards Document No 120 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of More Than 4 536 kg f the type of vehicle in both official languages or the word TYPE along with one of the following abbreviations namely i AMB to refer to an ambulance i 1 AT PA to refer to an auto transporter ii ATV VTT to refer to an all terrain vehicle iii B A to re
245. oms office that is open for business make a declaration signed by that person or that person s duly authorized representative setting out a the name and address of the company or individual importing the vehicle b the name of the manufacturer of the vehicle c the date the vehicle is presented for importation d the class make model and vehicle identification number of the vehicle e a statement that the vehicle bears an information label or compliance label as the case may be or where the importer is an individual a statement from the manufacturer or the duly authorized representative of that manufacturer that the vehicle described in the document conformed to the applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations at the time the main assembly of the vehicle was completed f a statement that on the date of its importation the vehicle conformed to the applicable standards prescribed under these Regulations at the time the main assembly of the vehicle was completed f 1 Repealed SOR 2003 2 s 47 g where the importer is an individual the month and year the main assembly of the vehicle was completed 2 The declaration that a person or the person s duly authorized representative must make prior to importation pursuant to paragraph 7 1 a of the Act shall be signed and contain the information set out in Schedule VII 3 The declarations made in accordance with subsection 2 a shall be filed with the Mi
246. ons set out in subsections 24 and 26 a force of 9 000 N 2 000 Ib is applied perpendicularly to any part of the door other than the window glass by a circular steel plate having a diameter of 150 mm 6 in anda thickness of 13 mm 1 2 in and c a single interior handle that operates the latching mechanisms and that is situated within 150 mm 6 in of a vertical plane equidistant from both sides of the aisle leading to the rear doors when the rear doors are closed and fully latched 18 3 The rear doors of a school bus referred to in subsection 18 2 shall under the conditions set out in subsections 24 and 26 and after undergoing the test specified in paragraph 18 2 b be capable of being opened from outside and inside the bus using a force not exceeding 180 N 40 Ib 19 Every push out window or other emergency exit in a bus shall for the purposes of identification and operation be identified with a label located within 150 mm six inches of its release mechanism bearing words in both official languages or an approved symbol that identifies the emergency exit and followed by concise operation instructions in both official languages except that school bus emergency exits shall be identified in accordance with the requirements of subsection 23 20 Where a release mechanism is not located within the occupant space of an adjacent seat a label indicating the location of the nearest release mechanism in both official langu
247. ontour de port e visuelle 2 For the purposes of this section the expressions manikin H point manikin H point with seat in rearmost position and H point used in an SAE Standard or SAE Recommended Practice mean seating reference point 3 Subject to subsection 3 1 every vehicle shall have a power driven windshield wiping system that has at least two frequencies or speeds and that has irrespective of engine speed and engine load a one frequency or speed of at least 45 cycles per minute b a difference of at least 15 cycles per minute between the highest frequency or speed and one of the lower frequencies or speeds and c the lower frequency or speed referred to in paragraph b equal to at least 20 cycles per minute 3 1 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a windshield shall have a windshield wiping system that conforms to the requirements of subsection 3 4 Compliance with subsection 3 shall be demonstrated by testing under the conditions specified in sections 4 1 1 and 4 1 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a May 1966 5 In the case of a passenger car or a three wheeled vehicle the windshield wiping system when tested wet in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice J903a May 1966 shall wipe the percentage of areas A B and C of the windshield that a is specified in Column Il of whichever of Tables II Ill or IV to this section is applicable and b is within the area b
248. or ice on the inside or outside surface of the glass d givrer entire windshield means area A as referred to in section 104 of this Schedule pare brise tout entier road load means the power output required to move the vehicle at the curb mass plus 180 kg on level clean dry smooth portland cement concrete pavement or other surface with an equivalent coefficient of surface friction at a specified speed through still air at 20 C and a standard barometric pressure of 101 3 kPa and includes driveline friction rolling friction and air resistance charge de route 2 Subject to subsection 2 1 every vehicle shall be equipped with a windshield defrosting and defogging system 2 1 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a windshield shall be equipped with a windshield defrosting and defogging system 3 In the case of a passenger car or a three wheeled vehicle the windshield defrosting and defogging system shall a meet the requirements of section 3 of SAE Recommended Practice J902 Passenger Car Windshield Defrosting Systems August 1964 when tested in accordance with paragraph b except that the areas referred to in that section as critical area and entire windshield shall be as referred to in subsection 1 of this section and b be tested in accordance with such of the portions of paragraphs 4 1 to 4 4 7 of SAE Recommended Practice J902 August 1964 or SAE Recommended Practice J902a March 1967 as are
249. orarily for special purposes v hicule de tourisme a usages multiples http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 9 de 131 non locking retractor means a retractor that does not have a locking mechanism from which the webbing can be extended to substantially its full length by a small external force that provides no adjustment for assembly length and that need not be capable of sustaining restraint forces at maximum webbing extension r tracteur sans blocage normal load Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 normal occupants mass Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 occupant means a person or manikin seated in a vehicle and unless otherwise specified means a person or manikin having the dimensions and weight of a 95th percentile adult male occupant occupant compartment air space Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 occupant distribution Repealed SOR 2008 258 s 1 occupant space means the space directly above the seat and footwell bounded vertically by the ceiling and horizontally by the normally positioned seat back and the nearest obstruction of occupant motion in the direction the seat faces espace d occupant off road motorcycle Repealed SOR 88 268 s 1 oil pressure indicator means a device that presents information concerning the pressure of the oil in the engine lubrication circuit indicateur de pression d huile oil pressure tell tale means a signal
250. osition for which it is installed is not available for use because the vehicle seat has been removed or converted to an alternate use such as the carrying of cargo 3 2 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 8 3 3 If a lower universal anchorage system is installed in a designated passenger seating position in the first row of designated seating positions in accordance with subsection 210 2 8 one user ready tether anchorage shall be installed in that designated seating position 3 4 The number of user ready tether anchorages required in the second row of designated seating positions under subsection 3 may be reduced by one if a user ready tether anchorage is installed in the first row in accordance with subsection 3 3 4 The portion of a user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook shall be readily accessible and if under a cover the cover shall be identified by one of the symbols or the mirror image of one of the symbols set out in Figure 2 and shall be removable without the use of tools Tether Anchorage Positioning 5 Subject to subsections 5 1 and 7 the portion of each user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with a tether strap hook shall be located within the shaded zone as shown in Figures 3 to 7 of the designated seating position for which it is installed with reference to the H point of a template described in section 4 1 of SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measu
251. ot apply to motor tricycles 14 Despite section S5 2 5 of TSD 123 it is not necessary for the footrest for a passenger on a motor tricycle to fold rearward and upward when not in use 15 A turn signal lamp display fitted on a motorcycle shall be green or yellow 16 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 79 306 s 5 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 82 656 s 3 SOR 88 268 s 10 SOR 93 31 s 5 SOR 94 374 s 5 F SOR 95 536 s 7 SOR 96 366 s 8 SOR 97 421 ss 10 11 F 12 F 22 F SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 2003 272 s 19 SOR 2007 180 s 10 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEMS STANDARD 124 124 1 Every passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle truck and bus shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 124 Accelerator Control Systems as amended from time to time 2 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 2007 180 s 10 SCHOOL BUS PEDESTRIAN SAFETY DEVICES STANDARD 131 131 1 Subject to subsection 2 every school bus shall be equipped with one or two stop signal arms that conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 131 School Bus Pedestrian Safety Devices TSD 131 as amended from time to time 2 The word ARR T may appear instead of or together with the word STOP in the manner specified with respect to the word STOP in S5 2 2 of TSD 131 3 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 96 366 s 9
252. other than a school bus shall have a the following rearview mirrors namely i an inside rearview mirror that meets the requirements of subsections 7 9 and 10 ii on the driver s side an outside rearview mirror that meets the field of view requirements of subsection 11 and iii on the side opposite the driver s side an outside rearview mirror that has not less than 90 per cent of the reflective surface area of the outside rearview mirror installed on the driver s side or b on each side of the vehicle an outside rearview mirror of which not less than 125 cm 19 5 square inches of reflective surface area is located so as to provide the driver with a view to the rear along both sides of the vehicle 27 Every multi purpose passenger vehicle truck and bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 pounds other than a school bus shall have on each side of the vehicle an outside rearview mirror of which not less than 325 cm 50 square inches of reflective surface area is located so as to provide the driver with a view to the rear along both sides of the vehicle Shipment 28 A company may ship a vehicle bearing a compliance label or information label as the case may be on which no outside mirrors have been installed if the applicable outside mirrors and all of the hardware that is necessary for their mounting accompany the vehicle and all of the holes that are necessary for mounting those mirrors have been made in t
253. ounded by a perimeter line on the glazing surface 25 mm from the edge of the daylight opening 6 Subject to subsection 7 every vehicle shall have a windshield washing system that meets the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J942 Passenger Car Windshield Washer Systems November 1965 except that the words the effective wipe pattern defined in SAE J903 paragraph 3 1 2 in paragraph 3 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J942 shall be replaced a in the case of a passenger car or a three wheeled vehicle by the words the areas established in accordance with the definition of areas A B and C in subsection 1 of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 104 and b in the case of a multi purpose passenger vehicle truck or bus by the words the pattern designed by the manufacturer for the windshield wiping system on the exterior surface of the windshield glazing 7 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a windshield shall have a windshield washing system that meets the requirements of subsection 6 TABLE PASSENGER CARS AND THREE WHEELED VEHICLES OF LESS THAN 1 520 MM OVERALL WIDTH http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 38 de 131 Column Column Il Column III Column IV Column V Column VI Minimum Percentage to be Angle in degrees Area wiped Left Right Up Down A entes 80 16 49 7 5 Bs 94 13 46 4 3 Cink 99 7 15 3 1 TABLE Il PASSENGER CARS AND THREE WHE
254. ours and d the AATCC Chromatic Transference Scale shall be used to evaluate the staining of the multifiber test fabric 7 A reference in TSD 209 to a standard published by ASTM or AATCC that is set out in column 1 of the table to this subsection may be read as a reference to the standard set out opposite that standard in column 2 of the table TABLE Item Column 1 Column 2 1 AATCC Test Method 30 1981 Fungicides AATCC Test Method 30 2004 Antifungal Activity Evaluation on Textiles Mildew and Rot Resistance Assessment on Textile Materials Mildew and Rot of Textiles Resistance of Textile Materials 2 ASTM B 117 73 Standard Method of Salt Spray ASTM B 117 03 Standard Practice for Operating Fog Testing Salt Spray Fog Apparatus 3 ASTM B 456 79 Standard Specification for ASTM B 456 03 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium 4 ASTM D 756 78 Standard Practice for ASTM D 756 93 Standard Practice for Determination of Weight and Shape Changes of Determination of Weight and Shape Changes of Plastics Under Accelerated Service Conditions Plastics Under Accelerated Service Conditions 5 ASTM E 4 79 Standard Methods of Load ASTM E 4 07 Standard Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines Verification of Testing Machines 6 ASTM G 23 81
255. ovement of the head of the anthropomorphic test device by means of a continuous seat back that is an integral part of the cushion and that i has a height measured along the cushion seat back surface in the vertical longitudinal plane passing through the longitudinal centre line of the cushion from the lowest point on the cushion seating surface that is contactable by the buttocks of the seated anthropometric test device of at least 560 mm 22 inches and ii has a width of not less than 200 mm 8 inches measured in the horizontal plane at the height of 560 mm 22 inches specified in subparagraph i and b limit to no more than 305 mm 12 inches from the initial position the distance either knee pivot can extend in the forward longitudinal direction 5 Every front facing built in child restraint system and built in booster cushion when tested in accordance with subsection 1 shall a not allow the angle between the system s or cushion s back support surface and the system s or cushion s seating surface to be less than 45 at the completion of the test b limit the resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometer mounted in the anthropometric test device upper thorax to not more than 60 g except for intervals of acceleration the cumulative duration of which is not more than 3 ms c limit to not more than 80 g the maximum resultant acceleration of the centre of gravity of the head of the anthropometric
256. owDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 40 de 131 as light emitting diode junction where the requirement applies to a lamp in which light is produced by a light emitting diode 7 For the purposes of this section the expression motor driven cycle used in TSD 108 means limited speed motorcycle TECHNICAL STANDARDS DOCUMENT NO 108 Required Motor Vehicle Lighting Equipment Section S5 1 of TSD 108 8 Despite section S5 1 1 of TSD 108 lamps and retroreflective devices that are contained within the same physical assembly as a headlamp and meet the requirements of section S7 4 h of TSD 108 in respect of resistance to corrosion dust and humidity are not required to be subjected to the corrosion dust and moisture tests required by any of the SAE Standards or Recommended Practices listed in Tables and Ill of TSD 108 9 Reserved 10 Where reflective material referred to in section S5 1 1 4 of TSD 108 is applied to a non vertical surface the entrance angle used to demonstrate that the material conforms to the performance standards prescribed by that paragraph shall be the sum of the entrance angle specified in Table 1 or Table 1A of SAE Standard J594f Reflex Reflectors January 1977 and the angle by which the material deviates from the vertical measured on the horizontal centreline of the sheeting 11 Sections 5 1 1 12 and S5 1 1 21 of TSD 108 do not apply 12 Despite sections S5 1 1
257. pealed SOR 95 147 s 1 incomplete trailer means a vehicle other than a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes that is capable of being drawn and that consists at a minimum of a chassis structure and suspension system but needs further manufacturing operations performed on it to become a completed vehicle remorque incompl te incomplete vehicle means a vehicle a other than a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes that is capable of being driven and that consists at a minimum of a chassis structure power train steering system suspension system and braking system in the state in which those systems are to be part of the completed vehicle but requires further manufacturing operations to become a completed vehicle or b that is an incomplete trailer v hicule incomplet incomplete vehicle manufacturer means a company that manufactures an incomplete vehicle by assembling components none of which taken separately constitutes an incomplete vehicle fabricant de v hicules incomplets indicator means the part of an instrument that shows the quantity of the physical characteristic that the instrument is designed to sense indicateur infant means a person whose mass is less than 9 kg b b infant restraint system Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 information label means the label required to be applied to an incomplete vehicle under section 6 2 or 6 4 tiquette informative information
258. plete vehicle fitted with a cab with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib shall be so constructed that a where the vehicle is tested in accordance with Annex 3 to ECE Regulation No 51 Uniform Provisions concerning the Approval of Motor Vehicles Having at Least Four Wheels with regard to Their Noise Emissions dated March 11 1996 excluding the requirements of paragraph 3 2 of that Annex the exterior sound level does not exceed i 81 dBA in the case of a heavy duty truck with an engine that produces less than 75 kW ii 83 dBA in the case of a heavy duty truck with an engine that produces at least 75 kW but less than 150 kW and iii 84 dBA in the case of a heavy duty truck with an engine that produces 150 kW or more or b where the vehicle is tested in accordance with the low speed sound emission test procedures set out in section 205 54 1 of subpart B part 205 chapter title 40 of the United States Code of Federal Regulations revised as of July 1 1995 the exterior sound level does not exceed 80 dBA SOR 2002 55 s 20 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 129 de 131 Interior Sound Level 5 Every truck or bus with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib shall be so constructed that where tested in accordance with section 4 of Test Method 1106 Noise Emission Tests August 2005 the interior sound level at the driver s seating position does not exceed
259. point 64 mm to the fore of and 10 mm above the seating reference point to the nearest contact point of the belt with the seat belt anchorage shall extend to the fore from that contact point at an angle to the horizontal of not less than 30 and not more than 75 b the seat belt bears on the seat structure as illustrated in Figure 3 of SAE Recommended Practice J383 June 1995 i the seat belt anchorage shall be aft of the rearmost contact point of the belt on the seat frame with the seat in its rearmost position and ii the line from the seating reference point to the nearest contact point of the seat belt with the seat frame shall extend to the fore from that contact point at an angle to the horizontal of not less than 30 and not more than 75 and c the seat belt anchorage is on the seat structure the line from the seating reference point to the nearest contact point of the belt with the anchorage shall extend to the fore from that contact point at an angle to the horizontal of not less than 30 and not more than 75 5 In the case of each non adjustable seat belt anchorage for the upper end of an upper torso restraint the intersection of the longitudinal centreline of the bolt hole and the surface of the mounting structure or in designs using another means of attachment to the vehicle structure the centroid of the means shall be located within the range indicated in section 6 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J383 Motor Ve
260. psi ARERR P195 70R14 200 kPa 29 psi SPARE SEEABOVE DE SECOURS VOIR CI DESSUS Se Yellow Text on Black Background or Black Text on Yellow Background Texte en jaune sur fond noir ou texte en noir sur fond jaune Figure 6 Tire Inflation Pressure Label Bilingual Example SOR 79 339 s 3 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 87 448 s 1 SOR 2003 272 s 12 SOR 2008 258 s 8 MIRRORS General 111 1 Any mirror referred to in this section that is installed on a vehicle shall a have a stable support b be adjustable in the horizontal and vertical directions c be a unit magnification mirror except in the cases referred to in subsection 6 paragraph 13 b and subsection 16 d be free of sharp points or edges that could cause an injury to an occupant of the vehicle or to a pedestrian e except in the case of a System B mirror installed on a school bus that has a forward control configuration be installed so that the driver s field of view through the mirror is not obscured by the portion of the windshield that is not wiped by the windshield wipers or by any opaque portion of the vehicle structure and f in the case of an outside rearview mirror have no greater protrusion beyond the perimeter of the vehicle than is necessary to meet the field of view requirements for the mirror prescribed in this section 2 A rearview mirror referred to in subsection 7 or 11 or paragraph 26 a shall be capable of ad
261. r SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 95 164 s 6 SOR 97 264 s 3 SOR 97 421 s 6 SOR 2005 45 s 4 SOR 2007 246 s 3 SOR 2008 104 s 13 SOR 2009 32 s 2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 115 1 Every vehicle shall have a vehicle identification number and that vehicle identification number shall not be the same as the vehicle identification number of a vehicle having a model year of 1980 or later manufactured within the preceding 60 years 1 1 A vehicle that is manufactured from an incomplete vehicle shall bear the vehicle identification number assigned by the incomplete vehicle manufacturer 1 2 Where a vehicle identification number is stated on a label bearing a statement of compliance affixed to a vehicle and the vehicle is altered the vehicle identification number shall apply to the altered vehicle 2 Subject to subsection 2 1 the vehicle identification number of each vehicle shall a be composed of capital sanserif characters b be sunk into embossed on or imprinted clearly and indelibly and in such a manner that the vehicle identification http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 56 de 131 number cannot be removed without damaging or defacing the plate label or vehicle on i an integral or structural part of the vehicle other than the dash board pad or dash board cover ii the dash board or dash board cover if it is not designed to be replaced following an air bag
262. r to the identification for that display shown in Table II to this section in a position that appears to be upright on or adjacent to the display it identifies a the headlamp upper beam tell tale b the turn signal tell tale c the hazard warning tell tale d the seat belt tell tale e the fuel level indicator or tell tale f the engine oil pressure indicator or tell tale g the engine coolant temperature indicator or tell tale h the battery charging condition indicator or tell tale the brake system malfunction tell tale j the antilock brake system malfunction tell tale k the speedometer N the odometer m the low tire pressure tell tale that does not identify which tire has low pressure n the low tire pressure tell tale that identifies which tire has low pressure and o the tire pressure monitoring system malfunction tell tale 9 1 Where fitted on a passenger car or three wheeled vehicle the following displays a description of which is given in section 135 of this Schedule and in TSD 135 mentioned in that section shall be in the colour specified in Table II to this section a the variable brake proportioning system malfunction b the parking brake applied c the low brake fluid condition d the gross loss of brake pressure condition and e the brake lining wear out condition 10 The indicators referred to in paragraphs 9 e to h k and and the indicator for the
263. rd or b the version of American National Standard ANSI AGA NGV2 Basic Requirements for Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle NGV Fuel Containers that is in effect 24 months before the date of the last manufacturing operation performed by the manufacturer who installed the fuel system as shown on the manufacturer s information label or the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle as shown on the compliance label or a more recent version of that Standard 5 A manufacturer of a vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall provide to the Minister on request information respecting the version of the standards referred to in subsections 3 and 4 with which the vehicle complies 6 Repealed SOR 2004 89 s 3 SOR 82 754 s 3 SOR 95 77 s 1 SOR 2001 152 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 19 SOR 2003 272 s 30 SOR 2004 89 s 3 SOR 2005 342 s 5 SOR 2008 104 s 21 FUEL SYSTEM INTEGRITY FOR THREE WHEELED VEHICLES AND MOTORCYCLES STANDARD 301 3 http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 122 de 131 301 3 1 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses a fuel with a boiling point of 0 C or higher as a source of energy for its propulsion shall meet the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J288 Snowmobile Fuel Tanks revised version of November 1983 except that section 1 of that Practice does not
264. re September 1 1998 need not comply with the requirement of subsection 21 42 Passenger cars manufactured before September 1 1998 need not comply with paragraph 22 b 43 Passenger cars manufactured before September 1 1999 and trucks buses and multi purpose passenger vehicles that have a GVWR of 3 856 kg or less and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2 495 kg or less manufactured on or after September 1 1998 but before September 1 2000 need not comply with paragraph 22 c if during the test referred to in subsection 23 a compression deflection of the sternum relative to the upper thorax portion of the spine of each anthropomorphic test device does not exceed 65 mm SOR 78 80 s 2 SOR 80 782 s 2 SOR 87 578 s 2 SOR 90 387 s 3 SOR 93 5 s 4 SOR 97 201 s 5 SOR 97 447 s 5 SOR 98 125 s 6 SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 2002 55 s 17 SOR 2003 272 s 24 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 12 SOR 2008 72 s 6 SOR 2008 104 s 16 F SEAT BELT ASSEMBLIES STANDARD 209 SOR 95 536 s 7 F 209 1 Every passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle truck bus low speed vehicle three wheeled vehicle and enclosed motorcycle shall be equipped with seat belt assemblies that conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 209 Seat Belt Assemblies TSD 209 as amended from time to time 2 The pelvic restraint of a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly that is equipped with a detachable upper torso re
265. restraint system for disabled persons Repealed SOR 98 160 s 1 pulpwood trailer Repealed SOR 99 357 s 1 push out window means a vehicle window designed to open outward to provide for emergency egress fen tre basculante readily removable window means a window that can be quickly and completely removed from a vehicle without tools and in the case of a bus having a GVWR of more than 4 535 9 kg 10 000 pounds shall include a push out window and a window mounted in an emergency exit that can be manually pushed out of its location in the vehicle without the use of tools regardless of whether the window remains hinged at one side to the vehicle fen tre amovible rear outboard designated seating position means any outboard designated seating position that is to the rear of a front outboard designated seating position but does not include a designated seating position adjacent to a walkway located between the seat and the side of the vehicle interior that is designed to allow access to more rearward seating positions place assise d sign e ext rieure arri re recreational trailer means a trailer designed to provide temporary living accommodation for travel vacation or recreational use remorque de camping replaceable bulb headlamp Repealed SOR 96 366 s 1 restraint system means a removable device designed to be installed in a vehicle for use in the restraint of an infant a child or a mobility impaired occupa
266. rier at a forward longitudinal velocity of 48 km h 30 miles per hour or ii the interior compartment door latch system is tested by being subjected to a force equal to a horizontal inertia load of 30 gin a longitudinal direction in accordance with SAE Recommended Practice Passenger Car Side Door Latch Systems SAE J839 July 1982 and c the instrument panel or seatback is tested in accordance with subsection 3 or 4 as the case may be 6 Repealed SOR 92 689 s 1 7 All interior compartment door assemblies that have a locking device shall be tested with the locking device in an unlocked position 8 A sun visor shall be provided at each front outboard designated seating position on every vehicle and shall be constructed of or covered with energy absorbing material and so mounted that each mounting shall not have a rigid material edge with a radius of less than 3 mm 0 125 inch that is statically contactable by a spherical head form with a diameter of 165 mm 6 5 inches 9 Each arm rest installed on a vehicle other than an arm rest referred to in subsection 10 shall meet at least one of the following performance requirements a be constructed of energy absorbing material that collapses laterally at least 50 mm 2 inches without permitting contact with any underlying rigid material b be constructed i of energy absorbing material that collapses to within 32 mm 1 25 inches of a rigid test panel sur
267. ring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 if a the H Point of the template is located http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 76 de 131 i at the unique Design H Point of the designated seating position as defined in section 3 11 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J1100 Motor Vehicle Dimensions February 2001 at the full downward and full rearward position of the seat or ii in the case of a designated seating position that is equipped with a lower universal anchorage system midway between the two lower universal anchorage system bars b the torso line of the template is at the same angle to the vertical plane as the vehicle seat back with the seat adjusted to its full rearward and full downward position and the seat back in its most upright position and c the template is positioned in the vertical longitudinal plane that contains the H point of the template 5 1 In the case of a bus no portion of the user ready tether anchorage shall be located on the bus floor 6 Repealed SOR 2008 72 s 8 7 The portion of a user ready tether anchorage in a vehicle that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook may be located outside the shaded zone referred to in subsection 5 if no part of the shaded zone is accessible without removing a seating component of the vehicle and the vehicle is equipped with a routing device that a ensures that the tether strap functions as i
268. rom H point W Point W reference point 50 mm vertically below and 50 mm horizontally back from R Point M Plane M reference plane 1 000 mm horizontally back from R Point NOOO BW Figure 3 Side View User ready Tether Anchorage Location http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 80 de 131 Vertical longitudinal plane Strap wrap around length from V point 250 W Point R Point V Point Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Portion of user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook to be located within shaded zone Drawing not to scale R Point Shoulder reference point V V reference point 350 mm vertically above and 175 mm horizontally back from H point W Point W reference point 50 mm vertically below and 50 mm horizontally back from R Point M Plane M reference plane 1 000 mm horizontally back from R Point NS ak Figure 4 Enlarged Side View of Strap Wrap around Area User ready Tether Anchorage Location Vertical longitudinal plane W Point 274 7 1 Median plane a Eh fof Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Portion of user ready tether anchorage that is designed to bind with the tether strap hook to be located within shaded http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c
269. roportioning system malfunction m the parking brake applied n a low brake fluid condition 0 a gross loss of brake pressure condition p a brake lining wear out condition q the transmission control position 1 the speedometer s the odometer a low tire pressure warning that does not identify which tire has low pressure u a low tire pressure warning that identifies which tire has low pressure and v a tire pressure monitoring system malfunction 3 An identification that is recognizable by the driver in daylight that is located on or adjacent to the relevant manual control and that appears to be upright when the control is in the off position shall be provided for a each function of or where a quantitative range is used the extreme positions of i the heating and air conditioning system controls and ii the automatic vehicle speed control b the engine start control if separate from the key locking system c the engine stop control if separate from the key locking system d the hand throttle e the identification lamp and clearance lamp switches if separate from the master lighting switch and f the choke if manually operated 4 Where colour coding is used to identify the extreme positions of heating and air conditioning system controls the hot extreme shall be identified by the colour red and the cold extreme shall be identified by the colour blue 5 An identification similar to the
270. rposes of subsections 16 to 25 a cylinders A D and E shall be 0 305 m 1 foot high and 0 305 m 1 foot in diameter b cylinders B and C shall be 0 915 m 3 feet high and 0 305 m 1 foot in diameter and c cylinders A B C D and E shall be of a colour that provides a high contrast with the road surface on which the bus is parked Requirements 16 Every school bus shall have the following two outside mirror systems a System A which consists on each side of the school bus of one unit magnification mirror that conforms to subsection 18 and one convex mirror that conforms to subsection 19 and b System B which consists on each side of the school bus of one convex mirror that conforms to subsections 20 to 24 17 A System A mirror and System B mirror shall conform to the provisions referred to in subsection 16 at any driver s eye position when they are adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 18 Each System A unit magnification mirror shall have a reflective surface area of not less than 325 cm 50 square inches that provides at the driver s eye position a field of view that includes a continuous view rearward of the side of the school bus and the road surface which view shall begin no farther than 60 m 200 feet rearward of the mirror s surface and extend to the horizon when measured on a level road as illustrated in Figure 1 19 Each System A convex mirror shall a provide at
271. rvoir de carburant du v hicule vehicle identification number means a number consisting of arabic numerals roman letters or both that the manufacturer assigns to the vehicle for identification purposes num ro d identification du v hicule vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes means a vehicle imported into Canada for a period not longer than one year solely for the purpose of a undergoing further manufacturing prior to export or b conducting works or operations that require a specially designed vehicle for entertainment industry productions civil engineering projects or similar works or operations v hicule import temporairement a des fins sp ciales vehicle manufactured for operation by persons with disabilities means a vehicle that incorporates a a level change device such as a wheelchair lift or a ramp for onloading or offloading an occupant in a wheelchair b an interior element of design intended to provide the vertical clearance necessary to permit a person in a wheelchair to move between the level change device and the driver s position or to occupy that position and c a driver s seating position that is equipped with an adaptive control or special driver accommodation to enable persons who have limited use of their arms or legs to operate a vehicle v hicule fabriqu pour tre conduit par une personne handicap e walk in van means a van type of truck in which a person having a height o
272. s and makes a declaration in the manner set out in subsection 6 4 Notwithstanding paragraph 3 c a person may import a vehicle that does not comply with section 210 of Schedule IV if before being certified by the registrar of imported vehicles the vehicle can be made to conform to that section by changing a seat or the seat tracks for a seat or seat tracks that are used in vehicles of the same make and model that are manufactured for the Canadian market 4 1 For the purposes of subsection 7 2 of the Act a vehicle that has been sold at the retail level in the United States and that has not been certified by the manufacturer as conforming to subsection 114 4 of Schedule IV to these Regulations may be imported into Canada despite not being certified to conform to subsection 114 4 if a the vehicle was fitted at the time of manufacture with an electronic immobilization system or b the person importing the vehicle states in their declaration that the vehicle i will be fitted with an immobilization system that conforms to National Standard of Canada CAN ULC S338 98 entitled Automobile Theft Deterrent Equipment and Systems Electronic Immobilization May 1998 published by the Underwriters Laboratories of Canada before it is presented for registration under the laws of a province and ii will be taken within 45 days after its importation to an inspection station authorized by the registrar of imported vehicles to carry out an
273. s Body Joint Strength October 20 2000 every body panel joint shall be capable of sustaining without separation a tensile force that is equal to 60 of the breaking tensile strength within the weakest body panel component attached by the joint 4 A body panel joint is not required to be tested if a test specimen cannot be obtained in accordance with Test Method 221 School Bus Body Joint Strength October 20 2000 or it has only one discrete fastener or spot weld 5 Despite subsection 2 the maintenance access panels referred to in paragraph 2 d shall have no unattached segment at the joint longer than 110 mm 6 On or before January 14 2002 a school bus having a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg may conform to this section or to section 221 as it read before the coming into force of this section 7 On or before January 14 2002 a school bus having a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less may conform to this section 8 After January 14 2002 every school bus shall conform to this section SOR 80 160 s 2 SOR 97 421 s 17 SOR 2001 36 s 1 SCHOOL BUS PASSENGER SEATING AND CRASH PROTECTION http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 114 de 131 222 1 In this section contactable surface means any surface within the head protection zone that is contactable from any direction by a head form test device except any surface on the front of a seat back or restraining barrier 76 mm three
274. s amended from time to time 2 A reference in TSD 106 to a standard published by ASTM that is set out in column 1 of the table to this subsection may be read as a reference to the standard set out opposite that standard in column 2 of the table TABLE Item Column 1 Column 2 1 ASTM B 117 64 Salt Spray Fog Testing ASTM B 117 03 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus 2 ASTM D 471 64 Method of Test for Change in ASTM D 471 06 Standard Test Method for Properties of Elastomeric Vulcanizers Resulting Rubber Property Effect of Liquids From Immersion in Liquids 3 ASTM E 4 64 Methods of Verification of Testing ASTM E 4 07 Standard Practices for Force Machines Verification of Testing Machines 3 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 79 677 s 3 SOR 79 907 s 1 SOR 93 561 s 4 SOR 97 421 s 16 SOR 2007 180 s 6 107 Repealed SOR 96 437 s 2 LIGHTING SYSTEM AND RETROREFLECTIVE DEVICES STANDARD 108 General 108 1 Every passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle motorcycle truck trailer and bus shall be equipped with the lamps retroreflective devices and associated equipment required by Technical Standards Document No 108 Lamps Reflective Devices and Associated Equipment TSD 108 as amended from time to time 1 1 Every three wheeled vehicle shall be equipped with the lamps retroreflective devices and associated equipment required by TSD 108 for passenger cars
275. s forming a 45 degree angle with the outer surface of the windshield glazing at each point along the top and side edges of the outer surface of the windshield glazing and the lower boundary of the windshield protected zone determined in accordance with subsection 5 in the plane perpendicular to the edge at that point 7 For the purposes of subsection 6 outer surface of the windshield glazing means the outer surface of the windshield glazing as configured before the test referred to in subsection 3 Cross section of windshield protected zone in typical Horizontal extension of the locus line R s vertical longitudinal plane from the outermost points of contact 45 M Points of contact between sphere and inner surface of windshield glazing Lower boundary of windshield protected zone FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW Note Drawing not to scale http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 113 de 131 Figure Windshield Protected Zone SOR 81 665 s 2 SOR 97 201 s 4 SOR 97 421 ss 17 22 F SOR 2008 72 s 12 F SOR 2009 121 s 4 ROLLOVER PROTECTION 220 1 This section applies only to school buses 2 Subject to subsection 3 when a force equal to 1 1 2 times the unloaded vehicle weight is applied to the roof of the vehicle s body structure through a force application plate as specified in Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods section 220 approved July 19 1976
276. s manufactured before September 1 2004 need not comply with this section http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 124 de 131 Legend h is the height of the centre of mass L is the longitudinal distance between the centre of mass and the centre of the front axle W is the wheelbase Figure 1 Side View oe l d E l t 2 d 1 CE t Eid median a longitudinal plane RES gt Ww Legend d is the horizontal distance from the centre of mass to the nearest roll axis tis the width of the wheel track of the front or rear axle W is the wheelbase Figure 2 Top View SOR 2003 272 s 33 SOR 2007 180 s 20 AXLES 901 1 No axle axle assembly or wheel tire suspension or other hardware of an axle assembly commonly referred to as running gear that is designed and manufactured exclusively for use on a mobile home or other vehicle that is not of a class prescribed by the Regulations shall be fitted to a trailer 2 The gross axle weight rating for each axle with which a trailer is equipped shall not a in the case of a vehicle equipped with demountable rims and spoke wheels exceed the rated load carrying capacity of i the suspension springs ii the axle iii the spoke wheels iv the demountable rims or v the tires and b in the case of a vehicle equipped with disc wheels and hubs exceed the rated load carrying
277. ssenger car or multi purpose passenger vehicle semi remorque series means the name that a manufacturer applies to a subdivision of a line denoting the price size or weight identification and that is utilized by the manufacturer for marketing purposes s rie service brake means the primary mechanism designed to stop a vehicle frein de service sloughing Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 snowmobile means a vehicle excluding a competition vehicle and a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes but including a snowmobile conversion vehicle that has a mass of not more than 450 kg is designed primarily for travel http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 12 de 131 on snow has one or more steering skis and is driven by means of an endless belt or belts in contact with the ground motoneige snowmobile conversion vehicle means a vehicle designed to be capable of conversion to a snowmobile by the repositioning or addition of parts v hicule convertible en motoneige snowmobile cutter means a sleigh designed to be drawn behind a snowmobile traineau de motoneige snowmobile trailer means a trailer designed primarily for the transportation of snowmobiles or snowmobile cutters remorque pour motoneige snub means the braking deceleration of a vehicle from a higher reference speed to a lower reference speed that is greater than zero ralentissement special dr
278. straint shall meet all requirements for a Type 1 seat belt assembly set out in these Regulations 3 The webbing of a seat belt assembly shall not transfer colour to a crock cloth either wet or dry to a greater degree than Rating 3 on the Chromatic Transference Scale specified in AATCC Evaluation Procedure 8 AATCC 9 Step Chromatic Transference Scale 2002 revision 4 Compliance of the webbing of a seat belt assembly with the requirements of subsection 3 shall be determined by testing the webbing from three seat belt assemblies in accordance with the procedure specified in AATCC Test Method 8 2005 Colorfastness to Crocking AATCC Crockmeter Method 5 The webbing of a seat belt assembly shall not stain to a greater degree than Rating 2 on the Chromatic Transference Scale specified in the AATCC Evaluation Procedure 8 AATCC 9 Step Chromatic Transference Scale 2002 revision 6 Compliance of the webbing of a seat belt assembly with the requirements of subsection 5 shall be determined by testing the webbing from three seat belt assemblies in accordance with the procedure specified in AATCC Test Method 107 2002 Colorfastness to Water except http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 73 de 131 a the test solution shall be freshly boiled distilled water b the AATCC perspiration tester shall be used c on removal from the oven the test specimen shall be hung to dry for four h
279. t faces the front of the vehicle and ii 762 mm 30 inches above the seating reference point where the seat faces the rear of the vehicle and b a front surface area of not less than 90 per cent of the seat bench width measured in millimetres or inches multiplied by 508 mm or 20 inches as the case may be that is i above the horizontal plane that passes through the seating reference point and ii below the horizontal plane that passes through a point 508 mm or 20 inches above the seating reference point 7 Where a school bus passenger seat that has another seat behind it is subjected to forward performance tests as specified in the test methods referred to in subsection 2 a the seat back force deflection curve shall fall within the zone specified in Figure 1 b the seat back deflection shall not exceed 356 mm 14 inches as determined from the force deflection curve c the seat shall not deflect by an amount such that any part of the seat moves to within 100 mm four inches of any part of another school bus passenger seat or restraining barrier in its originally installed position d the seat shall not separate from the vehicle at any attachment point e the seat components shall not separate at any attachment point and f the energy absorbed in deflecting the seat back shall be not less than 452W Nm 4000W inch pounds as determined from the force deflection curve 7 1 In subsection 7 force deflection curve
280. t the mid point of the cutter i the reflex reflectors referred to in SAE Recommended Practice J292 Snowmobile and Snowmobile Cutter Lamps Reflective Devices and Associated Equipment May 1995 or ii reflex reflectors that have a minimum area as projected in side elevation of 100 cm and that are composed of Class 1 or 3 reflective materials as specified in Canadian General Standards Board Standard CGSB 62 GP 11M Marking Material Retroreflective Enclosed Lens Adhesive Backing May 1978 of any colour or combination of colours set out in Table 1 of that Standard and with a reflective intensity value of Level 1 as specified in Table 2 of that Standard 3 The skis of a snowmobile cutter shall be capable of being clamped to a snowmobile trailer by means of a tie down cross bar attached to the trailer and passing over or through the skis SOR 2003 359 s 6 1203 to 1206 Repealed SOR 87 660 s 6 1207 to 1209 Repealed SOR 2003 359 s 7 1210 and 1211 Repealed SOR 87 660 s 8 SCHEDULE VII Subsections 11 2 and 6 DECLARATION OF IMPORTATION OF A VEHICLE FOR EXHIBITION DEMONSTRATION EVALUATION TESTING OR SPECIAL PURPOSES 1 Name of the manufacturer of the vehicle 2 Name and address of the person importing the vehicle 3 The month and year the vehicle was manufactured 4 The class make model and vehicle identification number of the vehicle 5 The date the vehicle is presented for importation 6 The p
281. t the requirements of the following parts of Chapter 6 of Directive 97 24 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of June 17 1997 on certain components and characteristics of two or three wheel motor vehicles as amended from time to time a Annex I except that section 1 0 does not apply and b Appendix 1 to Annex except that sections 2 2 and 4 of that Appendix do not apply 6 For the purposes of this section the words rated capacity and nominal capacity in Annex and Appendix 1 to Annex of Chapter 6 of Directive 97 24 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of June 17 1997 on certain components and characteristics of two or three wheel motor vehicles shall have the same meaning as vehicle fuel tank capacity as defined in subsection 2 1 of these Regulations 7 Motorcycles that are manufactured before September 1 2004 need not comply with this section SOR 2003 272 s 31 FLAMMABILITY OF INTERIOR MATERIALS STANDARD 302 302 1 The interior materials of every passenger car multi purpose passenger vehicle three wheeled vehicle truck and bus shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 302 Flammability of Interior Materials as amended from time to time 2 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 78 525 s 2 SOR 79 262 s 1 F SOR 2007 180 s 18 ELECTROLYTE SPILLAGE AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK PROTECTION STANDARD 305 305 1 Every passenger car and e
282. t to this section if the headlamps conform to all of the applicable photometric requirements when the wipers are stopped in any position in front of the lenses 7 Repealed SOR 91 692 s 3 SOR 79 305 s 2 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 84 812 s 4 SOR 91 692 s 3 SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 96 366 s 7 SOR 99 112 s 2 SOR 99 426 s 2 SOR 2001 60 s 2 SOR 2002 55 s 21 SOR 2003 272 s 11 SOR 2003 294 s 1 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E 109 Repealed SOR 79 339 s 3 TIRE SELECTION AND RIMS FOR MOTOR VEHICLES WITH A GVWR OF 4 536 KG OR LESS STANDARD 110 General 110 1 Every motor vehicle with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less except motorcycles other than motor tricycles equipped with passenger car tires restricted use motorcycles three wheeled vehicles equipped with tires other than passenger car tires vehicles imported temporarily for special purposes and low speed vehicles and every tire rim manufactured for use on those vehicles shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 110 Tire Selection and Rims for Motor Vehicles With a GVWR of 4 536 kg or Less TSD 110 as amended from time to time Technical Standards Document No 110 2 Except as provided in subsections 3 and 4 the information specified in sections S4 3 and S4 3 5 of TSD 110 shall appear at the option of the manufacturer either a in both official languages on one vehicle placard as shown in Figure 3 or if the manufacturer choos
283. t to separation or extension of the vehicle frame or b a body that consists of only a platform the primary cargo carrying surface of which is not more than 101 6 cm 40 inches above the ground in an unloaded condition but may include sides that are designed for easy removal and a permanent front end structure remorque lourde high pressure portion of the fuel system means for a vehicle that uses LPG or CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion all the components of the fuel system from and including the fuel container to but not including the first stage regulator partie haute pression du circuit d alimentation en carburant hub means a rotating member that provides for mounting of disc wheels moyeu hydraulic brake system means a system that uses hydraulic fluid as a medium for transmitting force from a service brake control to the service brake and that may incorporate a brake power assist unit or a brake power unit syst me de freinage hydraulique hydraulic system mineral oil Repealed SOR 2007 180 s 1 idle position means the position of the throttle at which it first comes in contact with an engine idle speed control appropriate for existing conditions according to the manufacturers recommendations respecting engine speed adjustments for a cold engine air conditioning emission control and throttle setting devices position de ralenti imported used vehicle Repealed SOR 92 173 s 1 importer Re
284. tainer remorque pour bois a pate rear extremity means the rearmost point on a trailer that is above a horizontal plane located above the ground clearance and below a horizontal plane located 1 900 mm above the ground when the trailer is configured as specified in subsection 7 and when the trailer s cargo doors tailgate and other permanent structures are positioned as they normally are when the trailer is in motion with non structural protrusions such as tail lamps rubber bumpers hinges and latches excluded http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 117 de 131 from the determination of the rearmost point extr mit arri re rear impact guard means a device installed on or near the rear of a trailer so that when the trailer is struck from the rear the device limits the distance that the striking vehicle s front end slides under the rear end of the trailer dispositif de protection arri re rounded corners means the outermost ends of a rear impact guard s horizontal member that curve upward coins arrondis side extremity means the outermost point on a trailer s side that is above a horizontal plane located above the ground clearance below a horizontal plane located 1 900 mm above the ground and between a transverse vertical plane tangent to the rear extremity of the trailer and a transverse vertical plane located 305 mm forward of that plane with non structural protr
285. ters ASTM E 77 98 reapproved in 2003 Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers ASTM E 298 01 Standard Test Methods for Assay of Organic Peroxides POWER OPERATED WINDOW PARTITION AND ROOF PANEL SYSTEMS STANDARD 118 118 1 Every power operated window system power operated partition system and power operated roof panel system fitted on an enclosed motorcycle a passenger car a three wheeled vehicle or on a multi purpose passenger vehicle or a truck with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less shall conform to the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 118 Power Operated Window Partition and Roof Panel Systems TSD 118 as amended from time to time http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 60 de 131 2 However vehicles manufactured before October 1 2010 need not comply with the requirements of section S6 of TSD 118 3 This section expires on January 1 2012 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 86 682 s 2 SOR 95 164 s 7 SOR 97 421 s 8 SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 2003 272 s 16 SOR 2006 94 s 4 E SOR 2007 180 s 8 TIRE SELECTION AND RIMS FOR MOTOR VEHICLES WITH A GVWR OF MORE THAN 4 536 KG STANDARD 120 General 120 1 Every motor vehicle with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg except vehicles imported temporarily for special purposes every three wheeled vehicle equipped with tires other than passenger car tires every motorcycle except
286. test device during forward movement except where it has been established that the maximum resultant acceleration above 80 g is caused by another part of the anthropometric test device striking its head and d subject to subsection 6 provide restraint against rearward movement of the head of the anthropomorphic test device by means of a continuous seat back that is an integral part of the system and that limits the rearward rotation of the anthropomorphic test device s head so that the angle between the head and the torso is at no time during the impact testing greater than 45 as compared to the head torso angle prior to the test 6 Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph 2 a a built in child restraint system with side supports extending at least 100 mm 4 inches forward from the padded surface of the portion of the restraint system provided for support of the child s head shall have a width of not less than 150 mm 6 inches measured in the horizontal plane at the height of 500 mm 20 inches 7 Every built in child restraint system shall provide a surface for the support of the child s back that has a continuous surface area of not less than 54 800 mm 85 square inches 8 Where a built in child restraint system provides surfaces for the support of the child s torso these surfaces shall have a continuous surface area of not less than 15 250 mm 24 square inches for each surface 9 Except for surfaces designed to
287. th official languages 43 The operator s manual referred to in section S7 8 5 2 b of TSD 108 shall be published by the manufacturer or importer of the vehicle in both official languages http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 42 de 131 43 1 Despite section S7 9 6 2 and Table IV of TSD 108 if a headlamp system installed on a motor tricycle consists of two headlamps that are horizontally disposed about the vertical centreline it may be installed in accordance with the requirements of section S 5 3 1 and Table IV of TSD 108 for headlamp systems installed on passenger cars DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS General 44 Every bus multi purpose passenger vehicle passenger car three wheeled vehicle and truck shall be equipped with two daytime running lamps or where the daytime running lamps are optically combined with the upper beams of the headlamps with two or four daytime running lamps 45 A daytime running lamp shall be white yellow or white to yellow in accordance with sections 3 1 3 3 1 2 and 3 1 3 1 respectively of SAE Standard J578 Color Specification May 1988 46 A daytime running lamp that is not optically combined with a headlamp shall conform to SAE Recommended Practice J575 Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and Components December 1988 47 Subject to subsection 47 1 a daytime running lamp that is not optically combined with another lamp or is optically
288. that it is easily readable from outside the trailer without moving any part of the trailer c in the case of a motorcycle or a restricted use motorcycle to a permanent part of the motorcycle as close as is practicable to the intersection of the steering post and the handlebars so that it is easily readable without moving any part of the motorcycle except the steering system or d in the case of a snowmobile or a snowmobile cutter to the rear half of the right side of the vehicle so that it is easily readable from outside the vehicle without moving any part of the vehicle 4 to 7 Repealed SOR 2002 55 s 4 8 In the case of a multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus manufactured from a cutaway chassis a motor home or a recreational trailer the compliance label shall display the following information in both official languages http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 18 de 131 a the cargo carrying capacity of the vehicle b the designated seating capacity except in the case of a recreational trailer c in the case of a motor home the total mass of the occupants which is obtained by multiplying the designated seating capacity by 68 kg and d in the case of a motor home or a recreational trailer i the mass of the fresh water hot water and waste water tanks when full and ii a statement that the displayed cargo carrying capacity is determined with the fresh water and
289. the vehicle 3 Truck Make model or line series chassis cab type engine type brake system and gross vehicle weight rating In addition for trucks with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less all restraint system types and their location in the vehicle 4 Bus Make model or line series body type engine type and brake system 5 Trailer Make type of trailer body type length and axle configuration 6 Motorcycle or restricted use motorcycle Make type of cycle line engine type and engine net power 7 Incomplete vehicle Make model or line series cab type engine type and brake system 8 Trailer converter dolly Make series and axle configuration 9 Snowmobile Make type of snowmobile line engine type and engine net power 10 Low speed vehicle Make engine type brake system all restraint system types body type and gross vehicle weight rating TABLE II MODEL YEAR CODES Year Code 2010 A 2011 B http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 58 de 131 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 WO ONOAARWONAKXKSKANADAVZAZH ACTA TAMIVOA TABLE III AUTHORIZED CHARACTERS Numbers 1234567890 Letters ABCDEFGHJKLMNPRSTUVWXYZ All spaces provided for in the vehicle identification number must be occupied by a character specified in this table TABLE IV LETTER VAL
290. the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle as shown on the compliance label or a more recent version of that Standard except that the following requirements do not apply a any requirement to obtain an approval from or to act under the supervision of an authority having jurisdiction or the boiler and pressure vessel inspection authority of a province or territory and b any requirement respecting inspection service or repair after the main assembly of the vehicle has been completed 3 1 A three wheeled vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion shall comply with the standard referred to in subsection 3 4 Only a CNG cylinder that is marked in accordance with the marking requirements in one of the following standards to indicate that the cylinder complies with that standard may be installed on a vehicle that is equipped with a fuel system that uses CNG as a source of energy for its propulsion a the version of Canadian Standards Association Standard CSA B51 Part 2 High Pressure Cylinders for the Onboard Storage of Natural Gas as a Fuel for Automotive Vehicles that is in effect 24 months before the date of the last manufacturing operation performed by the manufacturer who installed the fuel system as shown on the manufacturer s information label or the date of manufacture of the completed vehicle as shown on the compliance label or a more recent version of that Standa
291. those tests may be conducted using the procedures described for tests 1 and 16 in the ANSI Z26 Safety Code 1990 8 Instead of using the steel frame made in accordance with Figure 1 in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 required for tests 6 8 to 14 26 and 29 described in that Standard those tests may be conducted using a maple or similar hardwood frame made in accordance with Figure 1 in the ANSI Z26 Safety Code 1990 9 Instead of conducting the fracture test using the procedure for test 7 described in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 and testing the specimens specified in that test the fracture test may be conducted using the following procedure a test the uncracked and unbroken specimens remaining from test 6 described in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 b continue the procedure for test 6 by increasing the height from which the sphere is dropped by increments of 305 mm starting from a height of 3 35 m until each specimen is broken and c interpret the results in accordance with test 7 10 When conducting tests 9 and 12 described in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 the specimens of the glazing materials listed in item 14 of section 4 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 may be clamped in the frame of the holding fixture 11 When conducting test 26 described in the ANSI Z26 Safety Standard 1996 the specimens of the glazing materials listed in item 14 of section 4 of the ANSI Z26 Safety Stand
292. thstanding subsection 29 in the case of an open body type vehicle with no doors a tension relieving device may be deactivated manually 32 Where a vehicle is tested in accordance with subsection 23 and the vehicle is equipped at a front outboard designated seating position with a seat belt assembly that has a tension relieving device that permits the introduction of slack in the webbing of the upper torso restraint that webbing shall be adjusted to introduce the maximum amount of slack that is recommended in the owner s manual under normal conditions of use or where the owner s manual does not contain such a recommendation to the maximum amount of slack possible Accessibility of Seat Belts 33 Any seat belt assembly latch plate that is located outboard of a front outboard designated seating position of a vehicle shall be located within the outboard reach envelope as obtained in accordance with Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 of either the outboard arm or inboard arm when the latch plate is in its normal stowed position 34 There shall be sufficient clearance between a front outboard designated seating position seat and the side of the vehicle interior to allow a clearance test block that conforms to the dimensions set out in Figure 2 of Test Method 208 Occupant Restraint Systems in Frontal Impact December 1996 unhindered transit to the latch plate or buckle of any seat belt assemb
293. tical longitudinal plane that is at an angle of 75 5 to either side of a vertical longitudinal plane that is parallel to the vehicle s longitudinal centre line through the X point on the test device starting with a pre load force of 500 N iii applied initially along a horizontal line or along any line below or above that line that is at an angle to that line of not more than 5 iv attained within 30 seconds at any onset force rate of not more than 135 000 N s and v maintained at a level of 5 000 N for a minimum of 1 second 14 When a force of 5 000 N is applied in accordance with paragraph 13 b the lower universal anchorage system shall not permit the X point on the test device to be displaced in the direction of the applied force by more than 125 mm if the test device is installed in an outboard designated seating position or by more than 150 mm if the test device is installed in an inboard designated seating position 15 A lower universal anchorage system installed in a designated seating position that is not equipped with an associated user ready tether anchorage shall be tested by the application of a force of 11 000 N that is a applied by means of a test device shown in Figures 7 and 8 that is installed using only the lower universal anchorage system b applied in a forward direction parallel to the vehicle s vertical longitudinal plane through the X point on the test device starting with a pre load force o
294. tice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 92 de 131 100 Notes http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 93 de 131 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing notto scale Figure 3 Side Back and Top Views of Child Restraint Fixture RAT 560 320 Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing not to scale Figure 4 Three dimensional Schematic Views of Child Restraint Fixture with Side and Top Portions Removed 10 radius Notes 1 Dimensions in mm except where otherwise indicated 2 Drawing not to scale http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 94 de 131 Figure 5 Rear and Side View of Checking Device for Lower Universal Anchorage System Envelope Dimensions FRONT SEAT REAR SEAT Legend 1 Highest point of the rear seat cushion in the vertical longitudinal plane that passes through the centre of the driver s seat cushion if the vehicle is equipped with front bucket seats or through the centre of the steering wheel rim if the vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat 2 Longitudinal horizontal line tangent to point 1 extending between point 3 and point 4 The length of line 2 is defined as L CR 3 Rearward surface of the front seat back along line 2 4 Forward surface of the rear seat back alon
295. tly above the emergency door or exit on both the inside and outside surfaces of the bus and b have concise operating instructions describing the motions and if applicable sequence of motions necessary to unlatch and open the emergency door or exit in letters at least 9 5 mm 3 8 in high of a colour that contrasts with its background located within 150 mm 6 in of the release mechanism on the inside surface of the bus 24 For the purposes of subsections 2 13 15 17 and 18 a the vehicle shall be on a flat horizontal surface and b the temperature inside and outside shall be maintained between 20 C and 30 C 70 F and 85 F for a period of four hours immediately preceding the tests and during the tests 25 For the purpose of subsection 2 all windows installed in the vehicle shall be closed and latched in the manner intended for normal bus operation if latches are provided except that to demonstrate compliance of windows installed in http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 106 de 131 folding doors the test need not be performed with the doors installed in the vehicle 26 For the purposes of subsections 13 15 17 and 18 all seats arm rests and interior objects near the windows of the vehicle shall be adjusted for normal use with the seats in the upright position CY ke 2 INCHES H LIT 71 INCHES ZINCHES PA 15 0
296. traint system and built in booster cushion shall have indelibly printed on them or otherwise permanently affixed to them a label in both English and French in a prominent location in letters and numerals of not less than 10 point and on a contrasting background a a statement indicating i in the case of a built in child restraint system the weight and height range of the children for whom it is designed as recommended by the manufacturer and ii in the case of a built in booster cushion that it is for use by persons who weigh at least 18 kg 40 pounds and who are at least the minimum height recommended by the manufacturer b a statement warning that failure to follow the manufacturer s instructions on the use of the system or the cushion can result in the person striking the vehicle s interior during a sudden stop or crash c in the case of a built in child restraint system that has belts designed to restrain the child a statement to adjust snugly the belts provided with the system around the child and d in the case of a rear facing built in child restraint system a statement indicating that the child be placed in the rear facing position 18 The weights and heights referred to in paragraph 17 a shall be expressed with the metric measurements stated first followed by the equivalent imperial measurements in parentheses 19 Every built in child restraint system and built in booster cushion shall be accompanied b
297. uated in the head impact area shall when the reflective surface of the mirror is subjected to a force of 400 N 90 pounds in any direction that is not more than 45 from the forward longitudinal direction deflect collapse or break away without leaving sharp edges 11 An outside rearview mirror shall be installed on the driver s side of every passenger car and three wheeled vehicle in such a manner as to provide the driver with a field of view to the rear on a level road surface that a may be partially obscured by the rear body or fender contours b extends to the horizon and c includes a line measuring 2 5 m 8 feet perpendicular to and outboard from the vertical longitudinal plane tangent to the driver s side of the vehicle at its widest part at a point 10 6 m 35 feet behind the eyes of the driver seated with the driver s seat in the rearmost position 12 For the purposes of subsections 7 9 and 11 the field of view to the rear of the driver shall be evaluated by using a the location of the driver s eye reference points for the 95th percentile tangential cut off specified in SAE Recommended Practice J941a Passenger Car Driver s Eye Range August 1967 or b the driver s eye reference points at a nominal location appropriate for any 95th percentile adult male driver Motorcycles 13 Every motorcycle shall have mounted on each side so that the horizontal centre of each reflective surface of the mirror
298. ular to the vehicle s line of travel while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h ii by a collision barrier travelling at 48 km h impacting the vehicle from the rear and iii by a collision barrier travelling at 32 km h impacting the vehicle laterally on either side and b in the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of more than 4 536 kg by a moving contoured barrier assembly travelling at any speed up to and including 48 km h impacting the vehicle at any point and any angle 1 1 Instead of being tested in accordance with subparagraph 1 a ii a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may be tested in accordance with paragraph S6 2 b of TSD 301 except the fuel spillage requirements under the applicable conditions set out in sections 3 2 to 3 4 of Test Method 301 1 LPG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 and paragraph S7 3 b of TSD 301 1 2 Instead of being tested in accordance with subparagraph 1 a iii a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may be tested in accordance with paragraph S6 3 b of TSD 301 except the fuel spillage requirements under the applicable conditions set out in sections 3 2 to 3 4 of Test Method 301 1 LPG Fuel System Integrity February 28 2004 and paragraph S7 2 b of TSD 301 1 3 Subsections 1 1 and 1 2 expire on February 28 2009 2 When a vehicle is tested in accordance with subsection 1 1 1 or 1 2 a fuel spillage from th
299. umber of seating positions in a bench seat when calculated as the bench width in millimetres inches divided by 381 mm 15 inches with the quotient rounded to the nearest whole number or if the quotient is equidistant from two whole numbers to the higher thereof W 2 Every school bus shall when subjected to Motor Vehicle Safety Test Methods Section 222 School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash Protection December 19 1983 meet at all designated seating positions other than the driver s seat all the requirements of subsections 6 to 12 3 Any particular passenger seat of a school bus used as a test specimen when the school bus is subjected to the test methods referred to in subsection 2 need not meet further requirements after having been subjected to the requirements of a subsections 6 and 9 or b subsection 7 8 11 or 12 4 Passenger seats on a school bus shall face directly either the front or the rear of the vehicle 5 The number of seating positions in a bench type seat shall be obtained by dividing the bench width measured in millimetres or inches by 381 mm or 15 inches as the case may be and rounding the quotient to the nearest whole number or if the quotient is equidistant from two whole numbers to the higher thereof 6 Every school bus passenger seat shall be equipped with a seat back having a a height of not less than i 508 mm 20 inches above the seating reference point where the sea
300. urpose of the importation 7 The estimated period of time the vehicle will be used on public roads 8 Whether the vehicle will be removed from Canada or destroyed after completion of the purpose for which it is imported 9 The date the vehicle will be removed from Canada or destroyed I the undersigned declare that the information set out in this Authorized representative declaration is true and that a the vehicle is being imported into Canada solely for purposes of i exhibition demonstration evaluation or testing pursuant to paragraph 7 1 a of the Motor Vehicle Safety Act ii undergoing further manufacturing prior to export or iii conducting works or operations that require a specially designed vehicle and b the vehicle will remain in Canada for a period not longer than one year or in the case of a vehicle being imported under paragraph 7 1 a of the Act for such shorter period as the Minister specifies http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Signature of authorized representative Pagina 131 de 131 Date Note Subsection 7 5 of the Motor Vehicle Safety Act prohibits a person who signs the declaration referred to in paragraph 7 1 a of the Act to use or dispose of a vehicle other than in accordance with the terms of the declaration SOR 95 147 s 14 SOR 2000 182 ss 10 to 12 SCHEDULE VIII Paragraph 12 3 e DESIGNATED CUSTOMS OFFICES
301. usions such as tail lamps rubber bumpers hinges and latches excluded from the determination of the outermost point extr mit lat rale tanker trailer means a trailer that is designed exclusively to transport dangerous goods and that meets the rear impact protection requirements of National Standard of Canada CAN CSA B620 98 Highway Tanks and Portable Tanks for the Transportation of Dangerous Goods August 1998 including Appendices A and B as amended in April 1999 March 2000 July 2000 April 2001 November 2001 and May 2002 published by CSA remorque citerne wheels back trailer means a trailer whose rearmost axle is permanently fixed and located such that the rearmost surface of the rearmost tires of the size recommended by the trailer manufacturer for that axle is not more than 305 mm forward of the transverse vertical plane tangent to the rear extremity of the trailer remorque a roues arri re recul es APPLICATION 2 This section applies to every trailer with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or more other than a a pole trailer a pulpwood trailer a wheels back trailer or a trailer designed to be used as temporary living quarters b a low chassis trailer and c a trailer designed to interact with or having work performing equipment located in or moving through the area that would be occupied by a horizontal member that meets the configuration requirements of subsections 6 to 8 REAR IMPACT GUARD REQUIREMENT 3 Every trailer
302. very multi purpose passenger vehicle truck and bus with a GVWR of 4 536 kg or less that uses more than 48 nominal volts of electricity as propulsion power and that has an attainable speed in 1 6 km of more than 40 km h on a paved level surface shall conform to Technical Standards Document No 305 Electrolyte Spillage and Electrical Shock Protection as amended from time to time 1 1 Every three wheeled vehicle that uses more than 48 volts of electricity as propulsion power and that has an attainable speed in 1 6 km of more than 40 km h on a paved level surface shall comply with the requirements of Technical Standards Document No 305 Electrolyte Spillage and Electrical Shock Protection except sections S6 2 S6 3 S 7 4 and 7 5 as amended from time to time hereinafter referred to as TSD No 305 1 2 Instead of complying with section S7 2 3 of TSD No 305 a three wheeled vehicle including test devices and instrumentation shall be loaded to its unloaded vehicle weight except that the vehicle fuel tank shall be filled to not less than 90 per cent and not more than 95 per cent of the vehicle fuel tank capacity 1 3 Instead of being tested in accordance with section S6 2 of TSD 305 a vehicle referred to in subsection 1 may be tested in accordance with section S6 2 b of TSD 301 except the fuel spillage requirements under the applicable conditions set out in section S7 3 b of TSD 301 1 4 A vehicle tested in accordance with subsection
303. ward manually by one person to a position that provides a in the case of a side emergency exit door an opening at least 1 143 mm 45 in high and 610 mm 24 in wide located so that a vertical transverse plane tangent to the rearmost point of the closest seat back passes through the forward edge of the side emergency exit door and b in the case of a rear emergency exit door an opening at least 610 mm 24 in wide that allows the unobstructed passage of a rectangular parallelepiped that measures 143 mm 45 in in height 305 mm 12 in in width perpendicular to the sides of the bus and 610 mm 24 in in depth parallel to the sides of the bus the bottom of which remains within 25 mm 1 in of the floor at all times during its passage through the opening 18 1 After insertion of a rectangular parallelepiped described in paragraph 18 b a rear emergency exit door or where there are two rear emergency exit doors both doors shall be capable of being closed and latched 18 2 A school bus that has a GVWR of less than 4 536 kg 10 000 Ib and two rear doors that function as emergency exit doors shall have a a single release mechanism that simultaneously opens both rear doors in a manner such that neither rear door can interfere with the opening of the other rear door under any circumstances b hinging and latching mechanisms that prevent the rear doors from opening when they are closed and fully latched and under the conditi
304. wer may be turned on at any time g the wind velocity is at any level from 0 to 3 km h and h the test chamber temperature and the wind velocity shall be measured after the engine has been started at the forwardmost point of the vehicle or a point 91 4 cm 36 inches from the base of the windshield whichever is farther forward at a level halfway between the top and the bottom of the windshield on the vehicle centreline SOR 97 264 s 1 SOR 2003 272 s 8 SOR 2008 104 s 9 WINDSHIELD WIPING AND WASHING SYSTEM 104 1 In this section http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 37 de 131 areas A B and C means the areas referred to in Column of Tables Il Ill and IV to this section when established as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a Passenger Car Windshield Wiper Systems May 1966 using the angles specified in Columns Ill to VI of the above Tables zones A Bet C daylight opening means the maximum unobstructed opening through the glazing surface as defined in paragraph 2 3 12 of Section E Ground Vehicle Practice SAE Aerospace Automotive Drawing Standards September 1963 ouverture de jour glazing surface reference line means the intersection of the glazing surface and a horizontal plane 635 mm above the seating reference point as shown in Figure 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a May 1966 ligne de r f rence de la surface vitr e
305. wing not to scale Figure 12 Width of Lower Universal Anchorage Bar Top View SOR 2002 205 s 4 SOR 2003 272 s 27 SOR 2005 342 s 4 SOR 2006 94 ss 3 4 E SOR 2008 72 s 9 SOR 2008 104 s 17 211 Repealed SOR 97 421 s 13 WINDSHIELD MOUNTING 212 1 This section does not apply to a a truck multi purpose passenger vehicle or bus with a GVWR greater than 4 536 kg or b forward control configuration vehicles walk in vans or open body type vehicles with fold down or removable windshields 2 A vehicle to which this section applies shall be tested a by impacting a fixed collision barrier that is at 90 5 to the line of travel of the vehicle while the vehicle is travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 km h and b in accordance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 208 23 a and c 3 During the test referred to in subsection 2 the vehicle shall retain a not less than 50 per cent of the windshield periphery on each side of the vehicle longitudinal centre line if equipped with an air bag at a front designated seating position and b not less than 75 per cent of the windshield periphery if not equipped with an air bag at a front designated seating position 4 The test referred to in subsection 2 shall be conducted on the windshield mounting material and on all vehicle components in direct contact with the mounting material at a temperature that is not less th
306. y printed instructions in both English and French that provide a step by step procedure including appropriate diagrams for using the built in child restraint system or built in booster cushion for positioning a person in the system or on the cushion for adjusting the belts provided and if applicable for adjusting the restraint harness to fit the person 20 The instructions referred to in subsection 19 shall http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 101 de 131 a explain the immediate consequences of not following the instructions for proper use of the child restraint system in accordance with subsections 17 and 19 and b in the case of a seat with a built in child restraint system or built in booster cushion that is removable from the vehicle by means of a latch mechanism state that the system or cushion or the vehicle seat or both should be securely latched to the vehicle whether occupied or not SOR 94 669 s 6 SOR 2007 180 ss 16 21 SOR 2008 72 s 11 SOR 2008 104 s 18 SIDE DOOR STRENGTH 214 1 In this section initial crush resistance means the average force required to deform the door of a vehicle measured over the initial 152 mm of crush r sistance initiale a la d formation intermediate crush resistance means the average force required to deform the door of a vehicle measured over the initial 305 mm of crush r sistance interm diaire a la d
307. y tether anchorage crochet de la courroie d attache three wheeled vehicle means a vehicle other than a competition vehicle an antique reproduction vehicle a motorcycle a restricted use motorcycle a trailer or a vehicle imported temporarily for special purposes that a is designed to travel on three wheels in contact with the ground b has no more than four designated seating positions and c has a GVWR of 1 000 kg or less v hicule trois roues throttle means the component of the fuel metering device that a connects to the driver operated accelerator control system and b controls the engine speed papillon des gaz torso line means the line connecting the H point and the shoulder reference point described in SAE Standard J826 Devices for Use in Defining and Measuring Vehicle Seating Accommodation July 1995 ligne de torse trailer means a vehicle designed to carry or accommodate persons or property and to be drawn behind another vehicle and includes a bus trailer a pole trailer and a cable reel trailer but does not include a mobile home a trailer converter dolly or any earth moving equipment an implement of farm husbandry or a vehicle imported temporarily for special http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 13 de 131 purposes remorque trailer converter dolly means a conversion chassis that is equipped with one or more axles a lower half of a
308. ycle shall be so constructed that a where tested in accordance with Annex 3 to ECE Regulation No 41 Uniform Provisions concerning the Approval of Motor Cycles with regard to Noise dated January 19 1981 as amended September 14 1984 excluding the requirements of paragraph 3 2 of that Annex the exterior sound level does not exceed i 77 dBA in the case of a motorcycle with an engine displacement not exceeding 80 cm ii 80 dBA in the case of a motorcycle with an engine displacement exceeding 80 cm and not exceeding 175 cm and iii 82 dBA in the case of a motorcycle with an engine displacement exceeding 175 em or b where tested in accordance with i Appendix l 2 to subparts D and E part 205 chapter title 40 of the United States Code of Federal Regulations as amended by Vol 45 No 252 of the Federal Register of the United States published on December 31 1980 at pages 86727 and 86728 the exterior sound level does not exceed 70 dBA in the case of a motorcycle with an engine displacement not exceeding 50 cm and a maximum attainable speed of 48 km h on a level paved surface and ii Appendix l 1 to subparts D and E part 205 chapter title 40 of the United States Code of Federal Regulations as amended by Vol 45 No 252 of the Federal Register of the United States published on December 31 1980 at pages 86726 and 86727 the exterior sound level does not exceed 80 dBA in any other case 4 Every truck or incom
309. ystem malfunction indicator lamp that conforms to the requirements of S5 2 3 3 b to d of TSD 121 5 The test of the parking brake static retardation force that is referred to in S5 6 1 of TSD 121 shall be conducted in both the forward and rearward directions 6 This section expires on June 1 2013 SOR 78 351 s 2 SOR 79 547 s 1 SOR 79 940 s 7 SOR 80 638 s 2 SOR 92 250 s 4 SOR 94 374 s 5 F SOR 94 670 s 2 F SOR 95 147 s http laws justice gc ca en ShowDoc cr C R C c 1038 20090605 en 05 06 2009 Print Pagina 61 de 131 15 F SOR 96 89 ss 3 4 F SOR 97 200 s 6 SOR 97 421 ss 9 E 22 F SOR 98 524 s 4 F SOR 99 357 s 4 SOR 2002 55 s 21 SOR 2005 42 s 13 SOR 2008 104 s 14 SOR 2009 79 s 2 MOTORCYCLE BRAKE SYSTEMS STANDARD 122 General 122 1 Every motorcycle shall conform to Technical Standards Document No 122 Motorcycle Brake Systems as amended from time to time hereafter referred to as TSD 122 Technical Standards Document No 122 1 1 For the purposes of this section the words three wheeled motorcycle used in TSD 122 mean motor tricycle 2 The statement set out in section S5 1 2 2 of TSD 122 may be replaced by another statement to the same effect 3 Despite section S5 1 3 1 d of TSD 122 the indicator lamp shall display the identification symbol set out in Table II of section 101 of this Schedule for a brake system malfunction and that identification symbol s

Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents